Mm-10 Flow Meter

HN2172
FINAL DRAWING
VENDOR : KROHNE
Hull Number : HN 2172

IMO Number : 9776171Ship
Class : ABS
Registration : Hongkong
Ship Type : 21,4 13 TEU Container Vessel
Customer : Samsung Heavy Industries
Owner : Orient Overseas Container Line
Item : Coriolis Mass Flowmeter
Page 1 of 307
INDEX
1. CALCULATION SHEET for Coriolis Mass Flowmeter……………………………………………

3
2. SPECIFICATION for Coriolis Mass Flowmeter ……………………………………………….……

10
3. DIMENSION DRAWING for Coriolis Mass Flowmeter ……………………………………………

12
4. WIRING DIAGRAM for Coriolis Mass Flowmeter ……………………………………………….…

16
5. Document for PD Meter …………………………………………………………….………….……

18
6. CATALOGUE for Coriolis Mass Flowmeter …………………………………………………………

27
7. MANUAL for Coriolis Mass Flowmeter …………………………………………………………….

100
8. INSTALLATION GUIDE for Coriolis Mass Flowmeter ……………………………………………

305
Page 2 of 307
HN2172
CALCULATION SHEET
VENDOR : KROHNE

IMO Number : 9776171
Ship Class : ABS
Ship Type : 21,200 TEU Container Vessel
Page 3 of 307
KROSS 1.2 build 2119
OPTIMASS 6000 - S 25
KROSS Sizing
Project
Project SN2172/73/74/75/76/77
Tag No. AUX Boiler F.O (OF090F)
Customer SHI
Fluid
Aggregate state Formula Fluid
liquid Unknown
Process data
Minimal Nominal Maximal Unit
Density (operational) 0.989 S.G.
Viscosity 120.0 cSt
Temperature 80.0 °C
Pressure (gauge) 1.0 kg/cm²
Flow rate 1370 L/h (Volume)
Sizing details
OPTIMASS 6000 - S 25 1/2
Page 4 of 307
Flow rate [L/h] Velocity [m/s] Accuracy [%] Pressure drop [kg/cm²]
112.3 0.072 0.6507 0.0069
250.0 0.1602 0.2923 0.0156
333.0 0.2134 0.2195 0.0209
500.0 0.3205 0.1462 0.032
685.0 0.4391 0.1067 0.0446
750.0 0.4807 0.1 0.0492
856.2 0.5488 0.1 0.0567
1000 0.641 0.1 0.0672
1028 0.6586 0.1 0.0692
1199 0.7684 0.1 0.082
1250 0.8012 0.1 0.0859
1370 0.8781 0.1 0.0953
OPTIMASS 6000 - S 25 2/2
Page 5 of 307
KROSS Sizing
Project
Project SN2172/73/74/75/76/77
Tag No. G/E F.O (OF155F)
Customer SHI
Fluid
liquid Unknown
Process data
Viscosity 120.0 cSt
Sizing details
OPTIMASS 6000 - S 25 1/2
Page 6 of 307
147.6 0.0946 0.6507 0.0103

343.0 0.2199 0.28 0.0243
500.0 0.3205 0.1921 0.0359
1000 0.641 0.1 0.0742
1472 0.9435 0.1 0.1126
1500 0.9615 0.1 0.115
2000 1.282 0.1 0.1581
2400 1.538 0.1 0.1945
2500 1.602 0.1 0.2038
3000 1.923 0.1 0.2519
3500 2.243 0.1 0.3024
3600 2.307 0.1 0.3128
4000 2.564 0.1 0.3553
4200 2.692 0.1 0.3772
4500 2.884 0.1 0.4107
4800 3.077 0.1 0.4451
3 2.5
2 0.4
2.5 1.5 0.35
Pressure drop [kg/cm²]

1 0.3
2
Velocity [m/s]
Accuracy [%]
0.5
0.25
1.5 0
0.2
-0.5
1 0.15
-1
-1.5 0.1
0.5
-2 0.05
0 -2.5 0
0 500 1,000 1,500 2,000 2,500 3,000 3,500 4,000 4,500
Flow rate [L/h]
OPTIMASS 6000 - S 25 2/2
Page 7 of 307
KROSS Sizing
Project
Project SN2172/73/74/75/76/77
Tag No. M/E F.O (OF235F)
Customer SHI
Fluid
liquid Unknown
Process data
Viscosity 120.0 cSt
Sizing details
OPTIMASS 6000 - S 50 1/2
Page 8 of 307
273.0 0.0988 0.6481 0.0071

1008 0.365 0.1755 0.0277
2250 0.8147 0.1 0.0674
4500 1.629 0.1 0.0862
6750 2.444 0.1 0.1245
8250 2.987 0.1 0.1762
9068 3.283 0.1 0.1984
10062 3.643 0.1 0.2145
12000 4.345 0.1 0.2456
13500 4.888 0.1 0.3825
15000 5.431 0.1 0.4356
16100 5.829 0.1 0.4867
2.5
0.9
5.5
2
5 0.8
1.5
4.5 0.7
Pressure drop [kg/cm²]

4 1
0.6
Velocity [m/s]
Accuracy [%]
3.5 0.5
3 0.5
0
2.5 0.4
-0.5
2 0.3
-1
1.5
-1.5 0.2
1
0.5 -2 0.1
0 -2.5 0
0 2,500 5,000 7,500 10,000 12,500 15,000
Flow rate [L/h]
OPTIMASS 6000 - S 50 2/2
Page 9 of 307
HN2172
SPECIFICATION
VENDOR : KROHNE

Ship Class : ABS
Page 10 of 307
KROHNE Process Instrumentation - Always the Best Solutions.
TITLE : SPECIFICATION
ITEM : MASS FLOWMETERS
PJT NAME : [SN2172], [SN2173], [SN2174], [SN2175], [SN2176], [SN2177]
LOCATION : KOREA
DATA SHEETS FOR MASS FLOWMETERS
GENERAL 1 2 3
1. TAG NO. Q'TY M.E. F.O SUPPLY 1 G.E. F.O SUPPLY 1 AUX. BOILER F.O SUPPLY 1
2. FITTING NO. OF235F OF155F OF090F
3. AREA CLASSIFICATION - - -
4. LINE NO. - - -
5. LINE SIZE/SPEC - - - - - -
6. LINE SCH.NO/MATERIAL - - - - - -
7. P&ID NO. - - -
PROCESS DATA
8. FLUID / STATE H.F.O. LIQUID H.F.O. LIQUID H.F.O LIQUID
9. FLOWRATE-Min/Nor/M L/h 1,008 9,068 16,100 343 1,472 4,800 37 333 1,370
10. PRESSURE-Min/Nor/Max kg/cm2 g - 5 - - 5 - 1
11. DESIGN PRESS. kg/cm2 g - - -
12. TEMPERATURE-Min/Nor/Max ℃ - 80 98 - 80 98 - 80 98
13. DESIGN TEMP. ℃ - - -
14. MOLECULAR WEIGHT - - -
15. SPEC. GRAVITY @ OPER. 0.989 0.989 0.989
16. OPER. DENSITY kg/m3 - - -
17. VISCOSITY cSt 120cst at 80℃ 120 at 80℃ 120 at 80℃
18. ALLOWABLE P.DROP kg/cm2 g 0.7 0.7 0.1
19. VAPOR PRESSURE - - -
METER BODY/SENSOR
20. METER TYPE CORIOLIS MASS CORIOLIS MASS CORIOLIS MASS
21. MODEL OPTIMASS 6400C OPTIMASS 6400C OPTIMASS 6400C
22. MOUNTING INLINE INLINE INLINE
23. METER SIZE S50 S25 S25
24. END Connection TYPE ASME B16.5 Flanged ASME B16.5 Flanged ASME B16.5 Flanged
25. END Connection SIZE & RATING 50A JIS 20K RF 40A JIS 20K RF 25A JIS 20K RF
26. MEASURING TUBE MATERIAL SS316/316L SS316/316L SS316/316L
27. OUTER CYLINDER MATERIAL SS316/316L SS316/316L SS316/316L
28. FLANGES MATERIAL SS316/316L SS316/316L SS316/316L
30. ENCLOSURE Non Ex Non Ex Non Ex
TRANSMITTER/ELECTRONICS
31. MODEL MFC 400 C [Basic I/O] MFC 400 C [Basic I/O] MFC 400 C [Basic I/O]
32. MOUNTING Integral type Integral type Integral type
33. LOCAL DISPLAY Large Grafic back-light LCD Large Grafic back-light LCD Large Grafic back-light LCD
34. DISPLAY FUNCTION Flow, Total, Temp, Density Flow, Total, Temp, Density Flow, Total, Temp, Density
35. POWER SUPPLY 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC
36. PROCESS TEMPERATURE -50…+230 deg.C -50…+230 deg.C -50…+230 deg.C
37. AMBIENT TEMPERATURE -40…+60 deg.C -40…+65 deg.C -40…+65 deg.C
38. SIGNAL OUTPUT 4 -20mA (Active/Passive), HART 4 -20mA (Active/Passive), HART 4 -20mA (Active/Passive), HART
39. FLOW RANGE 0 - 16100 L/h 0 - 4800 L/h 0 - 1370 L/h
40. ACCURACY / REPEATABILITY +/- 0.1% (L) of M.V +/- 0.1% (L) of M.V +/- 0.1% (L) of M.V
41. PULSE OUTPUT Yes (Passive) Yes (Passive) Yes (Passive)
42. HOUSING MATERIAL Die-cast Alu. W/poly. coated Die-cast Alu. W/poly. coated Die-cast Alu. W/poly. coated
43. PROTECTION/ENCLOSURE IP66&67 / Non Ex IP66&67 / Non Ex IP67 / Non Ex
44. CABLE ENTRY M20X1.5 M20X1.5 M20X1.5
45. MANUFACTURER KROHNE KROHNE KROHNE
OPTION & ACCESSORIES
46. PAINTING MFR. STANDARD MFR. STANDARD MFR. STANDARD
47. SPECIAL CABLE N/A N/A N/A
NOTES
Page 11 of 307
HN2172
DIMENSIONAL DRAWING
VENDOR : KROHNE

Ship Class : ABS
Page 12 of 307
TAG No: M.E.F.O. SUPPLY (OF235F)
CONVERTER TYPE: MFC 400 C CERTIFIED
CONNECTION: 50 AJIS 20K NOTE: NOT ALL WETTED MATERIALS ARE AVAILABLE IN ALL SIZES.
COPY 123.5 137
O'ALL LENGTH (A): 715 mm
VOLTAGE: 24 V DC A.Hickford 09.06.16
X WETTED MATERIAL:
X STAINLESS STEEL 316L:
HASTALLOY C22:
DUPLEX UNS S31803: FLOW DIRECTION
INSTALLATION
3
3
E
Do NOT insulate
D
above this weld.
187
F 1
3
C
FLOW
DIRECTION
* Remote Reading
- Local reading is possible and also remote reading on
AMS is possible through signal output.
B 3
X Meter
Size A B C D E F G
G 2
08 see above 230 156 294 375 36.5 81
UNCONTROLLED
10 see above 230 156 294 375 36.5 81

15 see above 362 186 295 376 36.5 81 A 5
25 see above 464 282 312 393 51 118
X 50 see above 510 326 312 393 51 130
80 see above 691 411 347 428 84 188 DO NOT SCALE DRAWING NAME DATE
THIS DRAWING AND
SPECIFICATIONS HEREIN ARE UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED ALL KLTD
100 see above 684 457 374 455 110 243 DRAWN
THE PROPERTY OF KROHNE DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm
Ltd. AND MUST NOT CHECKED TITLE:
150 see above 844 555 399 480 137 273 BE LOANED OR OTHERWISE TOLERANCE (Unless otherwise specified):-
200 see above 1292 675 441 522 178 355 TRANSFERRED TO ANY THIRD WHOLE mm: 0 = 0.5 ENGINEER OPTIMASS 6400
PARTY OR REPRODUCED, DECIMALS: 0.0 = 0.1 or 0.00 = 0.10 ENG MGR - MECH
250 see above 1680 805 518 598 254 508 COPIED OR USED IN ANGLES: WHOLE DEGREES: 0 = 1° (inc. PED Appr.)
CONNECTION WITH THE DECIMALS: 0.0° = 0.1° or 0.00° = 0.10° ENG MGR - ELEC COMPACT 230°C
31.05.12 MANUFACTURE, PURCHASE (inc. Ex Appr.)
OR SALE OF ITEMS WITHOUT
(WITHOUT HEATING JKT)
ISSUE APPROVED
THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF or !! INDICATE KEY INSPECTION
KROHNE Ltd. DIMENSION. MATERIAL: SIZE DWG. NO. REVISION
REMOVE ALL SWARF, SCALE, RUST & LOOSE
REVISED /APPROVED BY
USED ON: FINISH: A3 7961009989-A
No. DESCRIPTION CODE DATE MATERIAL.
UNLESS SPECIFIED DEBURR & BREAK ALL EDGES
REVISION MAX WEIGHT: SCALE: 1:10 STATUS: Released SHEET 1 OF 1
Page 13 of 307
A3-TemplatePDM
TAG No: G.E.F.O. SUPPLY (OF155F)
CONVERTER TYPE: MFC 400 C
NOTE: NOT ALL WETTED MATERIALS ARE AVAILABLE IN ALL SIZES.
CONNECTION: 40 AJIS 20K
123.5 137
O'ALL LENGTH (A): 610 mm
VOLTAGE: 24 V DC
FLOW DIRECTION
X WETTED MATERIAL:
3
HASTALLOY C22:
E
DUPLEX UNS S31803: Do NOT insulate
D
above this weld.
187
CERTIFIED F 1
COPY
A.Hickford 09.06.16
3
* Remote Reading
C
X Meter
Size A B C D E F G
08 see above 230 156 294 375 36.5 81
10 see above 230 156 294 375 36.5 81
15 see above 362 186 295 376 36.5 81
X 25 see above 464 282 312 393 51 118
50 see above 510 326 312 393 51 130
80 see above 691 411 347 428 84 188 B 3
100 see above 684 457 374 455 110 243 G 2
150 see above 844 555 399 480 137 273
UNCONTROLLED
200 see above 1292 675 441 522 178 355

250 see above 1680 805 518 598 254 508 A 5
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING NAME DATE

THIS DRAWING AND
SPECIFICATIONS HEREIN ARE UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED ALL KLTD
DRAWN
Ltd. AND MUST NOT CHECKED TITLE:
BE LOANED OR OTHERWISE TOLERANCE (Unless otherwise specified):-
TRANSFERRED TO ANY THIRD WHOLE mm: 0 = 0.5 ENGINEER OPTIMASS 6400
COPIED OR USED IN ANGLES: WHOLE DEGREES: 0 = 1° (inc. PED Appr.)
CONNECTION WITH THE DECIMALS: 0.0° = 0.1° or 0.00° = 0.10° ENG MGR - ELEC COMPACT 230°C
OR SALE OF ITEMS WITHOUT
(WITHOUT HEATING JKT)
ISSUE APPROVED
USED ON: FINISH: A3 7961009989-B
Page 14 of 307
A3-TemplatePDM
AUX. BOILER F.O. SUPPLY
TAG No: (OF090F) CERTIFIED
CONVERTER TYPE: MFC 400 C NOTE: NOT ALL WETTED MATERIALS ARE AVAILABLE IN ALL SIZES.
CONNECTION: 25A JIS 20K
COPY 123.5 137
O'ALL LENGTH (A): 600mm A.Hickford 08.04.16
VOLTAGE: 24V DC
X WETTED MATERIAL:
HASTALLOY C22: FLOW DIRECTION
DUPLEX UNS S31803:
3
INSTALLATION
E
Do NOT insulate
D
above this weld.
187
F 1
3
C
FLOW
DIRECTION
* Remote Reading
B 3
X Meter
Size A B C D E F G
G 2
08 see above 230 156 294 375 36.5 81
10 see above 230 156 294 375 36.5 81
UNCONTROLLED
15 see above 362 186 295 376 36.5 81 A 5

X 25 see above 464 282 312 393 51 118
50 see above 510 326 312 393 51 130
80 see above 691 411 347 428 84 188 DO NOT SCALE DRAWING NAME DATE
THIS DRAWING AND
100 see above 684 457 374 455 110 243 SPECIFICATIONS HEREIN ARE UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED ALL KLTD
DRAWN
150 see above 844 555 399 480 137 273 Ltd. AND MUST NOT CHECKED TITLE:
BE LOANED OR OTHERWISE TOLERANCE (Unless otherwise specified):-
200 see above 1292 675 441 522 178 355 TRANSFERRED TO ANY THIRD WHOLE mm: 0 = 0.5 ENGINEER OPTIMASS 6400
250 see above 1680 805 518 598 254 508 COPIED OR USED IN ANGLES: WHOLE DEGREES: 0 = 1° (inc. PED Appr.)
CONNECTION WITH THE DECIMALS: 0.0° = 0.1° or 0.00° = 0.10° ENG MGR - ELEC COMPACT - 230°C
OR SALE OF ITEMS WITHOUT (WITHOUT HEATING JKT)
ISSUE APPROVED
USED ON: FINISH: A3 7961009989
Page 15 of 307
A3-TemplatePDM
HN2172
WIRING DIAGRAM
VENDOR : KROHNE

Ship Class : ABS
Page 16 of 307
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
M.E. F.O SUPPLY

A G.E. F.O SUPPLY A
Tag No.
AUX. BOILER F.O SUPPLY
B B
C C
D D
A08-001-09-PN(ME FO FLOW)
A08-001-10-PN(GE FO FLOW)
A08-001-11-PN(Aux. Boiler FO FLOWMETER)
E3-0.611-DCO-2.5 (2C) NK
A01-022-04-CH (ME FO FLOW)

A01-022-05-CH GE FO FLOW)
E3-0.25-TTCO(C)-0.75(1P)NG
Open Converter Side Cover
E E
POWER
A A- A+ B B- C C- D D- SUPPLY
N L
F - + F
BN BK
1A 1B
G G
Cable and all connections are SHI scope,

H H
Current Output Current Output Pulse Output Power DC 24V

4 ~ 20 mA 4 ~ 20 mA [PASSIVE] Supply Connection
with HART with HART
J
[ACTIVE] [PASSIVE] J
* Signal output can be used only one at KOREA

once a time with pulse output. It can be Title
Active or Passive. WIRING DIAGRAM

K
for MFC400 C K
N/A N/A
This drawing including the technical data, is our property. The drawing and any copies thereof
shall be returned on request. Neither the original drawing nor a copy thereof shall be disclosed
Page 17 of 307
or communicated in any other way to third parties.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
HN2172
PD METER
VENDOR : KROHNE

Ship Class : ABS
Page 18 of 307
Page
1. Scope of supply --------------------------------------------------------- 3
2. Specifications ------------------------------------------------------------ 3
3. Dimensions, Weight, Material specification ---------------------- 4
4. Flange dimensions ------------------------------------------------------ 5
Content 5. Installation (flow directions), Heat insulation, Operation ------ 6
6. Dials / VZFA -------------------------------------------------------------- 7
7. Wiring VZFA -------------------------------------------------------------- 7
8. Electrical Connection VZFA------------------------------------------- 8
9. Spare Parts --------------------------------------------------------------- 9
Table of Contents
 Meter configuration
 Supplementary Instructions
 Version of Measuring chamber
Instruction manual
 List of Spare parts and part numbers
 Figures
 Fault analysis
 Repair instructions and trouble shooting
Type Dimension Max. Temperature

□ VZO □ DN 15  130 °C
□VZOA □ DN 20 □ 180 °C
□ VZF □ DN 25
Anciliary VZO / VZOA
 VZFA  DN 40
□ DN 50 □ No pulser
□ Reed pulser RV
Pressure Anciliary VZF / VZFA

□ JIS 5K  Electronic register with
analog and pulse output
JIS 10K
□ JIS 16K
Installation position : horizontal, vertical
Flow direction : any (respecting flash on meter body)
Surface quality : Housing finish : enamelled red RAL 3013
Required strainer : Dirt trap(suction strainer), NOT part of flow meter

VZFA40 : mesh size max. 0.250mm or smaller
CH-4106 Therwil Drawn by April 26, 2016 C. H. Seo

Switzerland Checked by April 26, 2016 E. G. Kim Documentation PAGE 2
aquametro.com Approved by April 26, 2016 Edi Fluehmann
Page 19 of 307
1. Scope of Supply
- M/E CYLINDER OIL FLOW METER (TYPE : VZFA40FL130 / JIS10K)--------------- 1(One) Set
Operating conditions:
Liquid : Cylinder Oil
Viscosity : 211cSt at 40°C
2. Specifications
M/E CYLINDER OIL FLOW METER (SHI Fitting No. OL257F)
CONTOIL® oil flow meter VZFA 40 FL 130/25
Ring piston meter for mineral oil. Electronic register unit with display for total volume, resettable
volume, flow rate, litres, m3 or US gallons. Programmable outputs.
Nominal diameter: DN 40 mm
Connection for flanges: DN 40 to DIN 2501 (Drilled holes to JIS 10K Flanges)
Nominal pressure: PN 25 bar
Installation length: 300 mm
Installation position: horizontal / vertical
Temperature, max: 130 °C
Measuring range (at visc. 1…20 mPa.s): 225...9000 l/h
Max. continuous flow Qn: 6000 l/h
Max. measuring deviation: ± 0.5% of measured value
Repeatability: ± 0.1%
Registration capacity: 100 Mio
LCD display: 8 positions, 8 mm high
Outputs a): 1 digital and 1 analogue
or b): 2 digital
Function analogue output: 4...20 mA (flow rate)
Function digital output: volume pulses or
frequency (flow rate) or
limit switch
Nominal voltage: 24V DC
Power supply via 4...20 mA: 6...30V DC
Data security: with EEPROM
Protection degree (IEC60529): IP66
Ambient temperature: -25...+70°C
<Notice>
If the meter of cylinder oil is workded by gravity without pump, the installation position of cylinder oil
meter should be installed on the deck space under service tanker or measuring tank for considering
a pressure drop.

Switzerland Checked by April 26, 2016 E. G. Kim Specification PAGE 3
Page 20 of 307
3. Dimensions, Weight, Material VZFA
VZF / VZFA : Flanges DIN, flange drillings according to specification below
VZF/ VZFA 15, 20 and 25 mm
 VZF/ VZFA 40 and 50 mm

VZF / VZFA DN 15 DN 20 DN 25 DN 40 DN 50
L 165 165 190 300 350
B 105 105 130 210 280
H 155 164 191 243 299
h1 65 74 101 153 209
b 45 54 77 116 166
ØF 95 105 115 150 165
DIN PN 16 / 25 Ø F1 65 75 85 110 125
holes and Øh 4x14 4x14 4x14 4x18 4x18
JIS 5K Ø F1 60 65 75 95 105
 JIS 10K / 16K Ø F1 70 75 90 105 120
JIS 5K thread (no holes) 4xM10 4xM10 4xM10 4xM12 4xM12
 JIS 10K holes and Øh 4x15 4x15 4x19 4x19 4x19
JIS 16K holes and Øh 4x15 4x15 4x19 4x19 8x19
Weight kg (flange version) 3.8 4.5 7.5 20.3 41.0

Material specification
Housing Spheroidal graphite iron FCD400 / GGG40
Measuring chamber Cast brass / red brass
Rotary piston Aluminum alloy hard anodized,
classification approved
Static gaskets O-ring Viton / FPM
Nominal pressure / test pressure 25 bar / 40 bar

Dimensions, Weight,
Switzerland Checked by April 26, 2016 E. G. Kim PAGE 4
aquametro.com Approved by April 26, 2016 Edi Fluehmann Material VZFA
Page 21 of 307
4. Flange Dimension
Flanges are in DIN dimensions with drillings according to specification. Comparison DIN to JIS:
DN 15 DN 20 DN 25
 DN 40 DN 50
VZOA 15...50,

Flange Dimensions
aquametro.com Approved by April 26, 2016 Edi Fluehmann all CONTOIL types
Page 22 of 307
5. Installation
General Notice For lnstallation.
1) Do not install near to ship's vibration positions like Engine & Pump side or Etc...
2) Do not carry out air flushing or blowing to flowmeter. It make some damage to flowmeter.
3) Do install the strainer in front of flowmeter to prevent damage one.
Flow directions
Every flow meter DN 15...50 allows all flow directions without modification.
Just respect flash on housing.
Meter installation
Easy access for reading the meter and controlling the ancillary equipment is important.
Provided that the arrow on the housing is the direction of flow, the meter can be installed in any
position without any special modifications. The display is adjusted to the installed position in situ.
Do not mount the meter the head pointing downwards. Flow conditioners are unnecessary.
Optimized measuring concept
When flow meter is installed on suction side, consider pressure drop at highest, possible viscosity and
Max. Flow rate including strainer.
Heat insulation
※ Attention !
must be free of insulation,
ambient temperature max. 60 °C
insulation up to 50 mm

Installation, Heat-
aquametro.com Approved by April 26, 2016 Edi Fluehmann Insulation, Operation
Page 23 of 307
6. Dials
Dial VZFA Display of :
 Grand Total
 Resettable Total
 Flow rate
7. Wiring
Alternative 1 : Loop Power : Alternative 2 : DC 24V Power :
1 analog and 1 digital output 1 power supply and 2 digital outputs
The digital outputs are freely progammable for pulse, frequency or alarm (limit switch).
If pulse output is selected, the pulse width and the pulse value (volume) can be programmed as well.
Digital output : Solid state relay, max. 48 V AC/DC, max. 50 mA, max. 100 Hz
Analog output : 4...20 mA, Voltage range 6...30 V DC, max. load in Ohm = (U - 5V) : 0.0215 A

Reading / Wiring
aquametro.com Approved by April 26, 2016 Edi Fluehmann VZFA
Page 24 of 307
8. Electrical Connection Drawing / VZFA

Switzerland Checked by April 26, 2016 E. G. Kim Electrical Connection PAGE 8
Page 25 of 307
9. Spare parts
Spare parts DN 40
Supply
Pos Spare part Drawing Material Part no Remark
Working Spare
1 Gasket small FPM Viton 1 1 12985 DN 40
2 Gasket large FPM Viton 1 1 12994 DN 40

Switzerland Checked by April 26, 2016 E. G. Kim Spare parts DN40 PAGE 9
Page 26 of 307
HN2172
CATALOGUE
VENDOR : KROHNE

Ship Class : ABS
Page 27 of 307
TD_OPTIMASS_6000_en_130227_4001894102_R02.book Page 1 Wednesday, February 27, 2013 2:44 PM
OPTIMASS 6000 Technical Datasheet
Sensor for mass flow

• The high performance meter for process industries
• Cryogenic, high temperature and high pressure options
• Supreme liquid and gas performance with CT approval
The documentation is only complete when used in combination with the relevant
documentation for the signal converter.
© KROHNE 02/2013 - 4001894102 - TD OPTIMASS 6000 R02 en
Page 28 of 307
CONTENTS OPTIMASS 6000
1 Product features 3
1.1 The solution for extended temperature applications ...................................................... 3

1.2 Features and options........................................................................................................ 5
1.3 Meter / converter combinations....................................................................................... 6
1.4 Measuring principle (twin tube) ....................................................................................... 6
2 Technical data 8
2.1 Technical data................................................................................................................... 8

2.2 Measuring accuracy ....................................................................................................... 15
2.3 Guidelines for maximum operating pressure................................................................ 15
2.4 Dimensions and weights ................................................................................................ 20
2.4.1 Flanged versions................................................................................................................... 20
2.4.2 NAMUR dimensions .............................................................................................................. 31
2.4.3 Hygienic versions .................................................................................................................. 32
2.4.4 Heating jacket version .......................................................................................................... 35
2.4.5 Purge port option .................................................................................................................. 36
2.4.6 Burst disc option ................................................................................................................... 37
3 Installation 38
3.1 Intended use ................................................................................................................... 38

3.2 Mounting restrictions ..................................................................................................... 38
3.2.1 General installation principles ............................................................................................. 38
2 www.krohne.com 02/2013 - 4001894102 - TD OPTIMASS 6000 R02 en
Page 29 of 307
Product features
OPTIMASS 6000 PRODUCT FEATURES 1
1.1 The solution for extended temperature applications

A high level of performance, together with a wide operating temperature range up to 400°C /
752°F, makes the OPTIMASS 6000 the ideal choice for mass flow measurement in a wide variety
of applications.
Designed to meet the requirements of general purpose liquid and gas applications, the extended
low temperature range of -200°C / -328°F also makes the 6000 suitable for Liquid Natural Gas
(LNG) and cryogenic applications.
Combined with the power of the MFC 400, the OPTIMASS 6000 will provide accurate
measurement of volume, mass, density and concentration.
1 Standard flange process connections available.

2 Modular electronics with a range of output options.
3 Comprehensive diagnostic capabilities.
1 Remote terminal box
02/2013 - 4001894102 - TD OPTIMASS 6000 R02 en www.krohne.com 3
Page 30 of 307
1 PRODUCT FEATURES OPTIMASS 6000
Features:
• Innovative twin V-tube design
• Temperature range -200°C to +400°C
• Optional insulation / heating jacket
• Compact envelope
• Optimised flow divider for minimum pressure loss
• Modular electronics concept: electronics and sensor are easy to replace
• Self draining when mounted vertically
• Stability with entrained gas, even with gas concentrations 0...100%
Industries:
• Water and waste water
• Chemical
• Oil and gas
• Food and beverage
• Pharmaceutical
Applications:
• Crystallising, solidifying and cryogenic products
• Tanker loading
• General purpose applications
• CIP and SIP >130°C
• Liquid Natural Gas (LNG)
• Supercritical gases
Page 31 of 307
1.2 Features and options

Features
• Available as compact or remote.
• Nominal flow rates up to
325000 kg/h / 11940 lb/min.
• Self draining, when mounted vertically.
Connection options
• Standard flanges with ratings up to
1500 lb / PN160.
• Supports a wide range of industry standard
hygienic connections.
• Optional sealing faces.
• NAMUR NE132 flange lengths
Heating jacket and purge port

Heating jacket
• For use with temperature dependant products.
• Prevents solidification of process product.
• The heating case can also be used as a
cryogenic insulation case.
Purge port
• Allows hazardous chemicals to be drained away
safely.
Page 32 of 307
1 PRODUCT FEATURES OPTIMASS 6000
1.3 Meter / converter combinations
Converter MFC 400

Configuration Compact Remote field Remote wall
OPTIMASS 6000 6400C 6400F 6400W
1.4 Measuring principle (twin tube)

Meter from the side, showing tube layout
1 Measuring tubes
2 Drive coil
3 Sensor 1
4 Sensor 2
Static meter not energised and with no flow
1 Measuring tubes
2 Drive coil
3 Sensor 1
4 Sensor 2
A Coriolis twin tube mass flowmeter consists of two measuring tubes 1 a drive coil 2 and two
sensors (3 and 4) that are positioned either side of the drive coil.
Page 33 of 307
Energised meter
1 Measuring tubes
2 Direction of oscilation
3 Sine wave
When the meter is energised, the drive coil vibrates the measuring tubes causing them to
oscillate and produce a sine wave 3. The sine wave is monitored by the two sensors.
Energised meter with process flow
1 Process flow
2 Sine wave
3 Phase shift
When a fluid or gas passes through the tubes, the coriolis effect causes a phase shift in the sine
wave that is detected by the two sensors. This phase shift is directly proportional to the mass
flow.
Density measurement is made by evaluation of the frequency of vibration and temperature

measurement is made using a Pt500 sensor.
Page 34 of 307
Technical data
2 TECHNICAL DATA OPTIMASS 6000
2.1 Technical data

• The following data is provided for general applications. If you require data that is more
relevant to your specific application, please contact us or your local sales office.
• Additional information (certificates, special tools, software,...) and complete product
documentation can be downloaded free of charge from the website (Download Center).
Measuring system
Measuring principle Coriolis mass flow
Application range Mass flow and density measurement of fluids, gases and solids
Measured values Mass, density, temperature
Calculated values Volume, referred density, concentration, velocity
Sensor model range
Stainless Steel 316L 08...250 Compact / remote 100 barg @ 20°C / 1450 psig @ 68°F, temp. range
-70°C...+230°C / -94°F...+446°F
Remote only 100 barg @ 20°C / 1450 psig @ 68°F, temp. range
-50°C...+400°C / -58°F...+752°F
-200°C...+40°C / -364°F...+104°F
Hastelloy® 08...80 Compact / remote 200 barg @ 20°C / 2900 psig @ 68°F, temp. range
-70°C...+230°C / -58°F...+446°F
Duplex Stainless Steel 100...200 Compact / remote 200 barg @ 20°C / 2900 psig @ 68°F, temp. range
-50°C...+230°C / -58°F...+446°F
Design
Basic System consists of a measuring sensor and a converter to process the
output signal
Features Fully welded maintenance free sensor with twin V-shaped measuring tube
Variants
Compact version Integral converter
Remote version Available with field or wall versions of the converter
Modbus version Sensor with integral electronics. Modbus output for connection to a PLC
Measuring accuracy
Mass (standard)
Liquid (≥ 20:1 of nominal flow rate) ±0.1% of actual measured flow rate
Liquid (< 20:1 of nominal flow rate) ± zero stability (see zero stability below)
Gas ±0.35% of actual measured flow rate + zero stability
Mass (optional)
Repeatability
Liquid Better than 0.05% plus zero stability (includes the combined effects of
repeatability, linearity and hysteresis)
Gas Better than 0.2% plus zero stability (includes the combined effects of
Page 35 of 307
OPTIMASS 6000 TECHNICAL DATA 2
Zero stability
08 < 0.03 kg/h
10 < 0.06 kg/h
15 < 0.19 kg/h
25 < 0.95 kg/h
50 < 1.8 kg/h
80 < 3.9 kg/h
100 < 8.8 kg/h
150 < 16 kg/h
200 < 30 kg/h
250 < 50 kg/h
Reference conditions
Product Water
Temperature +20°C / +68°F
Operating pressure 1 barg / 14.5 psig
Effect on sensor zero point caused by a shift in process temperature
All materials sizes 08...10 0.0010% of nominal flow per 1°C / 0.00056% of nominal flow per 1°F
Pressure effect on mass flow rate
All materials sizes 08...50 0.005% per 1 barg / 0.00034 % per 1 psig
Density
Measuring range 100...3000 kg/m3 / 6...187 lbs/ft3
Accuracy ±1 kg/m3 / ±0.06 lbs/ft3
On site calibration ±0.2 kg/m3 / ±0.012 lbs/ft3
Process temperature effect 0.015 g/l per 1°C / 0.0083 g/l per 1°F
Temperature
Accuracy ± 0.5°C / ±0.9°F (± 0.5% of reading)
Operating conditions
Nominal flow rates (1 barg / 14.5 psig pressure drop)
08 600 kg/h / 22 lbs/min
10 1200 kg/h / 44 lbs/min
15 3800 kg/h / 139 lbs/min
25 19000 kg/h / 698 lbs/min
50 35000 kg/h / 1286 lbs/min
80 78000 kg/h / 2866 lbs/min
100 175000 kg/h / 6430 lbs/min
150 320000 kg/h / 11758 lbs/min
200 550000 kg/h / 20209 lbs/min
250 1000000 kg/h / 36743 lbs/min
Assumes operating density 1000 kg/m3 / 62.4 lb/ft3
For Hastelloy® meters, assume a pressure drop of 1.15 barg
Page 36 of 307
Maximum flow rates

All meters 150% of nominal flow rate
Ambient temperature
Compact version with Aluminium -40...+65°C / -40…+149°F
converter
Compact version with Stainless Steel -40...+55°C / -40…+131°F
converter
Remote versions Standard temperature range: -40...+65°C / -40…+149°F
Cryogenic temperature range: -20...+65°C / -4…+149°F
Hazardous Area versions Refer to temperature limits
Process temperatures
Standard temperature range (flange connections)
Safe area -70…+230°C / -94…+446°F
Hazardous area -50…+230°C / -58…+446°F
High temperature range -50…+400°C / -58…+752°F
Cryogenic temperature range -200…+40°C / -328…+104°F
Standard temperature range (hygienic connections)
Safe area -70…+150°C / -94…+302°F
Nominal pressure at 20°C
20 C / 68°F
68 F
Measuring tube SS 316 / 316L Hastelloy® C22 / S31803
FM / PED 97/23/EC -1…100 barg / -14.5…1450 psig -1…200 barg / -14.5…2900 psig
CRN / ASME B31.3 -1…100 barg / -14.5…1450 psig Pending
Outer casing burst pressure
08 ≈ 100 barg
10
15
25
50 ≈ 70 barg
80
100 ≈ 10 barg
150
200
250
If the process temperature is higher than 20°C / 68°F, the burst pressure will be lower. For more information please
contact the manufacturer.
Fluid properties
Permissible physical condition Liquids, gases, slurries
Permissible gas content (volume) Contact manufacturer for information.
Permissible solid content (volume) Contact manufacturer for information.
Protection category (acc. to EN 60529) IP 67, NEMA 4X
Installation conditions
Inlet / outlet runs None required
Page 37 of 307
Materials
Stainless Steel (316 / 316L) meter
Measuring tubes / Flanges Stainless Steel AISI 316 / 316L (1.4401 / 1.4404) dual certified
Spigots Stainless Steel CF3M (1.4409)
Bridge Stainless Steel AISI 304 / 304L (1.4301 / 1.4307) dual certified or AISI 316 /
316L (1.4401 / 1.4404) dual certified
Outer casing Stainless Steel AISI 316 / 316L (1.4401 / 1.4404) dual certified
Stainless Steel (S31803) meter
Measuring tubes / Flanges Stainless Steel UNS 31803 (1.4462)
Spigots Stainless Steel J92205 (1.4470)
316L (1.4401 / 1.4404) dual certified
Hastelloy®
Hastelloy C22 meter
Measuring tubes / raised face Hastelloy® C22
(Backing) flanges Stainless Steel AISI 316 / 316L (1.4401 / 1.4404) dual certified
Bridge Stainless Steel AISI 316 / 316L (1.4401 / 1.4404) dual certified
Outer casing Stainless Steel AISI 316L (1.404) dual certified
Heating jacket version
Heating loop and insulation jacket Stainless Steel AISI 316 (1.4401)
All versions
Junction box (remote version) Die-cast Aluminium (polyurethane coating)
Optional Stainless Steel 316 (1.4401)
Process connections
Flange
DIN (EN 1092-1 2007) DN10…300 / PN16…160
ASME (B616.5) ½...12" / ASME 150…1500
JIS (2220 2001) 10A...300A / 10...20K (10K maximum allowable temperature 300°C / 572°F)
Hygienic (08...50 only)
Tri-clover ¾...3"
Tri-clamp DIN 32676 DN15..80
Tri-clamp ISO 2852 1...3"
DIN 11864-2 Form A (female) DN15...80
Male thread DIN 11851 (threaded DN15...80
sanitary connection)
Male thread SMS 25...76 mm / 1...3"
Electrical connections
Electrical connections For full details, including: power supply, power consumption etc., see
technical data for the relevant signal converter.
I/O For full details of I/O options, including data streams and protocols, see
Page 38 of 307
Approvals
Mechanical
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Namur NE 21/5.95
acc. to CE
2004/108/EC (EMC)
2006/95/EC (Low Voltage Directive)
European Pressure Equipment Directive PED 97-23 EC (acc. to EN13445-3)
CRN acc. to ASME B31.3 (pending)
NACE MR0175 / ISO 15156 ("Sulphide Stress Corrosion Cracking Resistant Metalic
Materials for OIl Field Equipment") and MR0103 ("Materials Resistant to
Sulfide Stress Cracking in Corrosive Petroleum Refining Environments")
ATEX (acc. 94/9/EC)
OPTIMASS 6400C non Ex i signal outputs
Ex d connection compartment II 1/2 G Ex d ia IIC T6....T1 Ga/Gb
II 2 D Ex t IIIC T270°C Db
Ex e connection compartment II 1/2 G Ex de ia IIC T6....T1 Ga/Gb
OPTIMASS 6400C Ex i signal outputs
Ex d connection compartment II 1/2(1) G Ex d ia [ia Ga] IIC T6....T1 Ga/Gb
II 2(1) D Ex t [ia Da] IIIC T270°C Db
Ex e connection compartment II 1/2(1) G Ex de ia [ia Ga] IIC T6....T1 Ga/Gb
OPTIMASS 6000 / 6000F II 1 G Ex ia IIC T6...T1 Ga
II 1 D Ex ia IIIC T270°C Da
ATEX (acc. 94/9/EC) temperature limits

OPTIMASS 6000 / 6000F with or without heating jacket / insulation.
Ambient temp. Tamb °C Medium temp. Tm °C Temp. class Max. Surface temp. °C
-40...40 -50...40 T6 T80
-50...150 T3 T190
-50...230 T2-T1 T270
-40...55 -50...40 T6 T80
-50...150 T3 T190
-50...230 T2-T1 T270
-40...65 -50...40 T6 T80
-50...150 T3 T190
-50...230 T2-T1 T270
Cryogenic version
-20...65 -200...40 T6-T1 T80
OPTIMASS 6400C with aluminium converter housing, with or without heating jacket / insulation
-40...40 -50...40 T6 T80
-50...150 T3 T190
-50...230 T2-T1 T270
Page 39 of 307
-40...50 -50...40 T6 T80

-50...150 T3 T190
-50...230 T2-T1 T270
-40...65 -50...65 T4-T1 T105
Cryogenic version
-40...65 -200...40 T6-T1 T80
OPTIMASS 6400C with SS converter housing, with or without heating jacket / insulation.
-40...40 -50...40 T6 T80
-50...150 T3 T190
-50...230 T2-T1 T270
-40...50 -50...40 T6 T80
-50...150 T3 T190
-50...230 T2-T1 T270
-40...60 -50...60 T4-T1 T100
Cryogenic version
-25...+60 -200...40 T6-T1 T80
High temperature versions
OPTIMASS 6000F - HT with aluminium junction box, heating jacket and insulation
-40...40 -50...40 T6 T80
-50...230 T2 T270
-50...400 T1 T440
-40...55 -50...40 T6 T80
-50...230 T2 T270
-50...400 T1 T440
-40...60 -50...40 T6 T80
-50...230 T2 T270
-50...400 T1 T440
-40...65 -50...350 T1 T390
OPTIMASS 6000F - HT with SS junction box, heating jacket and insulation
-40...40 -50...40 T6 T80
-50...230 T2 T270
-50...400 T1 T440
-40...50 -50...40 T6 T80
-50...230 T2 T270
-50...400 T1 T440
-40...55 -50...40 T6 T80
-50...230 T2 T270
-50...400 T1 T440
-40...60 -50...350 T1 T390
OPTIMASS 6000F - HT with aluminium or SS junction box, insulation but no heating jacket
-40...40 -50...40 T6 T80
-50...230 T2 T270
-50...400 T1 T440
Page 40 of 307
-40...55 -50...40 T6 T80

-50...230 T2 T270
-50...400 T1 T440
-40...65 -50...40 T6 T80
-50...230 T2 T270
-50...400 T1 T440
Maximum end loadings (Stainless Steel 316 / 316L)

S08 / S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250
S10
Flanges
20°C 40 barg 15 kN 25 kN 38 kN 48 kN 99 kN 130 kN 250 kN 300 kN 350 kN
100 barg 12 kN 17 kN 19 kN 15 kN 20 kN 100 kN 150 kN 150 kN 200 kN
60 barg 5 kN 20 kN
400°C 27.4 5 kN 6 kN 10 kN 12 kN 20 kN 50 kN 80 kN 100 kN 150 kN
barg
40 barg 4 kN 5 kN 20 kN
Hygienic (all connections)
150°C 10 barg 5 kN 9 kN 12 kN 12 kN 18 kN N/A N/A N/A N/A
Maximum end loadings (Hastelloy® and Stainless Steel UNS S31803)

H08 / H10 H15 H25 H50 H80 D100 D150 D200
Flanges (not including CRN)
20°C 200 barg 12 kN 17 kN 19 kN 15 kN 20 kN 100 kN 150 kN
230°C 145 barg 5 kN 20 kN
Flanges (CRN regions)
20°C 200 barg 12 kN 17 kN 19 kN 15 kN 20 kN 60 kN 30 kN 10 kN
1
230°C 145 barg 5 kN 20 kN
2
1 D200 limited to 180 barg at 20°C
2 D100 and D150 limited to 120 barg at 230°C. D200 limited to 110 barg at 230°C
• DN08...50 (axial) loads have been calculated, based on 316L schedule 40 process pipework,
where un-radiographed butt welds have been used in pipe joints.
• The loads shown are the maximum permitted static load. If loads are cycling (between
tension and compression) these loads should be reduced. For advice, consult the
manufacturer.
Page 41 of 307
2.2 Measuring accuracy
X nominal flow rate [%]

Y measuring error [%]
Measuring error
The measuring error is obtained from the combined effects of accuracy and zero stability.
Product Water
2.3 Guidelines for maximum operating pressure

Notes:
• Ensure that the meter is used within its operating limits
• All hygienic process connections have a maximum operating rating of 10 barg
at 150°C / 145 psig at 302°F
Page 42 of 307
Pressure / temperature de-rating (metric) for meters with SS 316 measuring tubes.
Standard temperature range.
X temperature [°C]
Y pressure [barg]
1 Measuring tube PED certification

2 Hygienic connection
Pressure / temperature de-rating (imperial) for meters with SS 316 measuring tubes.
X temperature [°F]
Y pressure [psig]
1 Measuring Tube PED certification

Page 43 of 307
Pressure / temperature de-rating (metric) for meters with SS 316, PED certified
measuring tubes. High temperature range.
X temperature [°C]
Y pressure [barg]
Pressure / temperature de-rating (imperial) for meters with SS 316, PED certified
X temperature [°F]
Y pressure [psig]
Page 44 of 307
Pressure / temperature de-rating (metric) for meters with SS 31803 and Hastelloy®
Hastelloy
C22, PED certified measuring tubes. Standard temperature range
X temperature [°C]
Y pressure [barg]
1 PED / CRN H08...80

2 CRN D100...150
3 CRN D200
Hastelloy®
Pressure / temperature de-rating (imperial) for meters with SS 31803 and Hastelloy
C22, PED certified measuring tubes. Standard temperature range.
X temperature [°F]
Y pressure [psig]
1 PED / CRN H08...80

2 CRN D100...150
3 CRN D200
Page 45 of 307
measuring tubes. Cryogenic temperature range.
X temperature [°C]
Y pressure [barg]
Pressure / temperature de-rating (imperial) for meters with SS 316 measuring tubes
PED certified. Cryogenic temperature range.
X temperature [°F]
Y pressure [psig]
Flanges
• DIN flange ratings are based on EN 1092-1 2007 table G.4.1 material group 14EO
• ASME flange ratings are based on ASME B16.5 2003 table 2 material group 2.2
• JIS flange ratings are based on JIS 2220: 2001 table 1 division 1 material group 022a
• JIS 10K flanges are limited to a maximum temperature of 300°C / 572°F
Page 46 of 307
Notes
• The maximum operating pressure will be either the flange rating or the measuring tube
rating, WHICHEVER IS THE LOWER!
• The manufacturer recommends that the seals are replaced at regular intervals. This will
maintain the hygienic integrity of the connection.
2.4 Dimensions and weights

2.4.1 Flanged versions
Meter weights
kg
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250
Aluminium 9.3 10.1 12.9 23.5 29.4 58.9 94.3 193.6 443.6 911.2
(compact)
Stainless Steel 15.2 16 18.8 29.4 35.3 64.8 100.2 199.5 449.5 917.1
(compact)
Aluminium 5.8 6.6 9.4 19.9 25.9 55.4 90.8 190.1 440 907.6
(remote)
Stainless Steel 6.6 7.3 10.2 20.7 26.6 56.1 91.5 191.5 440.8 908.4
(remote)
Heating jacket add 3.1 4.5 7 7.9 12.7 15.7 27.6 N/A
lbs
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250
Aluminium 20.5 22.3 28.4 51.8 64.8 129.8 207.9 426.8 978 2008.8
(compact)
Stainless Steel 33.5 35.3 41.4 64.8 77.8 142.9 220.9 440.7 991 2021.9
(compact)
Aluminium 12.8 14.5 20.7 43.9 57.1 122.1 200.2 419.1 970 2001
(remote)
Stainless Steel 14.55 16.1 22.5 45.6 58.6 123.7 201.7 422.2 971.8 2002.7
(remote)
Heating jacket add 6.8 9.9 15.4 17.4 28 34.6 60.8 N/A
The weights shown are for meters fitted with PN40 flanges. Smaller or larger flange sizes will
affect the overall weight. For further information, please contact the manufacturer.
Page 47 of 307
Meter dimensions
1 Compact version
2 Remote version
General dimensions
mm
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250
A ±3 156 186 282 326 411 547 555 675 805
C 123.5
D 137
E1 ±3 (compact) 375 376 393 428 455 480 522 598
E2 ±3 (remote 250°C) 295 296 316 348 375 400 442 518
E2 ±3 (remote 400°C) 335 336 353 388 415 440 482 558
F ±2 81 118 130 188 243 275 355 508
inches
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250
A ±0.11 6.14 7.3 11.1 12.8 16.2 21.5 21.8 26.6 31.7
C 4.9
D 5.4
E1 ±0.12 (compact) 14.8 14.8 15.5 16.8 17.9 18.9 20.5 23.5
E2 ±0.12 (remote 482°F) 11.6 11.6 12.4 13.7 14.8 15.7 17.4 20.4
E2 ±0.12 (remote 752°F) 13.2 13.2 13.9 15.3 16.3 17.3 19 22
F ±0.08 3.2 4.6 5.1 7.4 9.6 10.8 14 20
Page 48 of 307
Dimension B for meters with Stainless Steel measuring tubes

mm (±5)
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250
PN16
DN80 - - - - - - 970 - - -
DN100 - - - - - - 1000 1154 - -
DN150 - - - - - - - 1200 1572 -
DN200 - - - - - - - - 1586 -
DN250 - - - - - - - - - 2100
DN300 - - - - - - - - - 2026
PN40
DN10 335 347 - - - - - - - -
DN15 341 353 510 - - - - - - -
DN25 - - 514 600 - - - - - -
DN40 - - - 610 709 - - - - -
DN50 - - - - 715 895 - - - -
DN80 - - - - - 915 986 - - -
DN100 - - - - - - 1000 1180 - -
DN150 - - - - - - - 1200 1612 -
DN200 - - - - - - - - 1638 -
DN250 - - - - - - - - - 2080
DN300 - - - - - - - - - 2100
PN63
DN50 - - - - 743 923 - - - -
DN80 - - - - - 943 1014 - - -
DN100 - - - - - - 1026 1206 - -
DN150 - - - - - - - 1240 1652 -
DN200 - - - - - - - - 1682 -
DN250 - - - - - - - - - 2120
DN300 - - - - - - - - - 2150
PN100
DN10 355 367 - - - - - - - -
DN15 355 367 524 - - - - - - -
DN25 - - 550 636 - - - - - -
DN40 - - - 644 743 - - - - -
DN50 - - - - 755 935 - - - -
DN80 - - - - - 955 1026 - - -
DN100 - - - - - - 1050 1230 - -
DN150 - - - - - - - 1280 1692 -
DN200 - - - - - - - - 1722 -
DN250 - - - - - - - - - 2184
DN300 - - - - - - - - - 2210
Page 49 of 307
mm (±5)
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250
ASME 150
½¨ 361 373 530 - - - - - - -
¾¨ - - 540 - - - - - - -
1¨ - - 546 632 - - - - - -
1½¨ - - - 644 743 - - - - -
2¨ - - - - 747 926 - - - -
3¨ - - - - - 939 1010 - - -
4¨ - - - - - - 1022 1202 - -
6¨ - - - - - - - 1228 1640 -
8¨ - - - - - - - - 1666 -
10¨ - - - - - - - - - 2074
12¨ - - - - - - - - - 2100
ASME 300
½¨ 371 383 540 - - - - - - -
¾¨ - - 550 - - - - - - -
1¨ - - 558 644 - - - - - -
1½¨ - - - 658 757 - - - - -
2¨ - - - - 759 939 - - - -
3¨ - - - - - 957 1028 - - -
4¨ - - - - - - 1042 1222 - -
6¨ - - - - - - - 1246 1658 -
8¨ - - - - - - - - 1686 -
10¨ - - - - - - - - - 2106
12¨ - - - - - - - - - 2132
ASME 600
½¨ 383 395 552 - - - - - - -
¾¨ - - 562 - - - - - - -
1¨ - - 572 658 - - - - - -
1½¨ - - - 674 773 - - - - -
2¨ - - - - 779 959 - - - -
3¨ - - - - - 977 1048 - - -
4¨ - - - - - - 1086 1266 - -
6¨ - - - - - - - 1298 1710 -
8¨ - - - - - - - - 1742 -
10¨ - - - - - - - - - 2186
12¨ - - - - - - - - - 2194
JIS 10K
50A - - - - 715 895 - - - -
80A - - - - - 915 986 - - -
100A - - - - - - 1022 1202 - -
150A - - - - - - - 1202 1652 -
Page 50 of 307
mm (±5)
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250
200A - - - - - - - - 1666 -
250A - - - - - - - - - 2106
300A - - - - - - - - - 2124
JIS 20K
10A 341 353 - - - - - - - -
15A 341 353 510 - - - - - - -
25A - - 514 600 - - - - - -
40A - - - 610 709 - - - - -
50A - - - - 715 895 - - - -
80A - - - - - 915 986 - - -
100A - - - - - - 1022 1240 - -
150A - - - - - - - 1240 1652 -
200A - - - - - - - - 1666 -
250A - - - - - - - - - 2106
300A - - - - - - - - - 2124
inches (±0.2)
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250
PN16
DN80 - - - - - - 38.2 - - -
DN100 - - - - - - 39.3 45.4 - -
DN150 - - - - - - - 47.2 61.9 -
DN200 - - - - - - - - 62.4 -
DN250 - - - - - - - - - 82.7
DN300 - - - - - - - - - 79.8
PN40
DN10 13.2 13.7 - - - - - - - -
DN15 13.4 13.9 20.1 - - - - - - -
DN25 - - 20.2 23.6 - - - - - -
DN40 - - - 24 27.9 - - - - -
DN50 - - - - 28.1 35.2 - - - -
DN80 - - - - - 36 38.8 - - -
DN100 - - - - - - 39.4 46.4 - -
DN150 - - - - - - - 47.2 63.5 -
DN200 - - - - - - - - 64.5 -
DN250 - - - - - - - - - 81.9
DN300 - - - - - - - - - 82.7
PN63
DN50 - - - - 29.2 36.3 - - - -
DN80 - - - - - 37.1 39.9 - - -
Page 51 of 307
inches (±0.2)
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250
DN100 - - - - - - 40.4 47.5 - -
DN150 - - - - - - - 48.8 65 -
DN200 - - - - - - - - 66.2 -
DN250 - - - - - - - - - 83.5
DN300 - - - - - - - - - 84.6
PN100
DN10 14 14.4 - - - - - - - -
DN15 14 14.4 20.6 - - - - - - -
DN25 - - 21.6 25 - - - - - -
DN40 - - - 25.3 29.2 - - - - -
DN50 - - - - 29.7 36.8 - - - -
DN80 - - - - - 37.6 40.4 - - -
DN100 - - - - - - 41.3 48.4 - -
DN150 - - - - - - - 50.4 66.6 -
DN200 - - - - - - - - 67.8 -
DN250 - - - - - - - - - 85.9
DN300 - - - - - - - - - 87
ASME 150
½¨ 14.2 14.7 20.9 - - - - - - -
¾¨ - - 21.2 - - - - - - -
1¨ - - 21.5 24.9 - - - - - -
1½¨ - - - 25.3 29.2 - - - - -
2¨ - - - - 29.4 36.5 - - - -
3¨ - - - - - 37 39.8 - - -
4¨ - - - - - - 40.2 47.3 - -
6¨ - - - - - - - 48.3 64.6 -
8¨ - - - - - - - - 65.6 -
10¨ - - - - - - - - - 81.6
12¨ - - - - - - - - - 82.7
ASME 300
½¨ 14.6 15.1 21.2 - - - - - - -
¾¨ - - 21.6 - - - - - - -
1¨ - - 22 25.3 - - - - - -
1½¨ - - - 25.9 29.8 - - - - -
2¨ - - - - 30 37 - - - -
3¨ - - - - - 37.7 40.5 - - -
4¨ - - - - - - 41 48.1 - -
6¨ - - - - - - - 49 65.3 -
8¨ - - - - - - - - 66.4 -
10¨ - - - - - - - - - 82.9
12¨ - - - - - - - - - 83.9
Page 52 of 307
inches (±0.2)
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250
ASME 600
½¨ 15.1 15.5 21.7 - - - - - - -
¾¨ - - 22.1 - - - - - - -
1¨ - - 22.5 25.9 - - - - - -
1½¨ - - - 26.5 30.4 - - - - -
2¨ - - - - 30.7 37.7 - - - -
3¨ - - - - - 38.5 41.2 - - -
4¨ - - - - - - 42.8 49.8 - -
6¨ - - - - - - - 51.1 67.3 -
8¨ - - - - - - - - 68.6 -
10¨ - - - - - - - - - 86
12¨ - - - - - - - - - 86.4
JIS 10K
50A - - - - 28.2 35.2 - - - -
80A - - - - - 36 38.8 - - -
100A - - - - - - 40.2 47.3 - -
150A - - - - - - - 47.3 65 -
200A - - - - - - - - 65.5 -
250A - - - - - - - - - 82.9
300A - - - - - - - - - 83.6
JIS 20K
10A 13.4 13.9 - - - - - - - -
15A 13.4 13.9 20 - - - - - - -
25A - - 20.2 23.6 - - - - - -
40A - - - 24 27.9 - - - - -
50A - - - - 28.2 35.2 - - - -
80A - - - - - 36 38.8 - - -
100A - - - - - - 40.2 48.8 - -
150A - - - - - - - 48.8 65 -
200A - - - - - - - - 62.6 -
250A - - - - - - - - - 82.9
300A - - - - - - - - - 83.6
Dimension B for meters with Hastelloy® and Stainless Steel (UNS S31803) measuring tubes
mm
H08 H10 H15 H25 H50 H80 D100 D150 D200

PN40
DN15 328 353 - - - - - - -
DN25 - - 510 - - - - - -
DN40 - - - 600 - - - - -
DN50 - - - - 715 - - - -
Page 53 of 307
mm
H08 H10 H15 H25 H50 H80 D100 D150 D200

DN80 - - - - - 915 - - -
PN63
DN50 - - - - 715 - - - -
DN80 - - - - - 915 - - -
PN100
DN15 328 353 - - - - - - -
DN25 - - 510 - - - - - -
DN40 - - - 600 - - - - -
DN50 - - - - 715 - - - -
DN80 - - - - - 915 - - -
PN160
DN15 328 353 - - - - - - -
DN25 - - 510 - - - - - -
DN40 - - - 600 - - - - -
DN50 - - - - 715 - - - -
DN80 - - - - - 915 1042 - -
DN100 - - - - - - 1070 1250 -
DN150 - - - - - - - 1306 1718
DN200 - - - - - - - - 1742
ASME 150
½¨ 328 353 - - - - - - -
1¨ - - 510 - - - - - -
1½¨ - - - 600 - - - - -
2¨ - - - - 715 - - - -
3¨ - - - - - 915 - - -
ASME 300
½¨ 328 353 - - - - - - -
1¨ - - 510 - - - - - -
1½¨ - - - 600 - - - - -
2¨ - - - - 715 - - - -
3¨ - - - - - 915 - - -
ASME 600
½¨ 328 353 - - - - - - -
1¨ - - 510 - - - - - -
1½¨ - - - 600 - - - - -
2¨ - - - - 715 - - - -
3¨ - - - - - 915 - - -
ASME 900
1½¨ - - - 600 - - - - -
2¨ - - - - 715 - - - -
3¨ - - - - - 915 1086 - -
Page 54 of 307
mm
H08 H10 H15 H25 H50 H80 D100 D150 D200

4¨ - - - - - - 1112 1292 -
6¨ - - - - - - - 1342 1754
8¨ - - - - - - - - 1798
ASME 1500
½¨ 328 353 - - - - - - -
1¨ - - 510 - - - - - -
1½¨ - - - 600 - - - - -
2¨ - - - - 715 - - - -
3¨ - - - - - 915 1118 - -
4¨ - - - - - - 1130 1310 -
6¨ - - - - - - - 1406 1818
8¨ - - - - - - - - 1900
JIS 10K
50A - - - - 715 - - - -
80A - - - - - 915 - - -
JIS 20K
15A 328 353 - - - - - - -
25A - - 510 - - - - - -
40A - - - 600 - - - - -
50A - - - - 715 - - - -
80A - - - - - 915 - - -
inches
H08 H10 H15 H25 H50 H80 D100 D150 D200

PN40
DN15 12.9 13.9 - - - - - - -
DN25 - - 20.1 - - - - - -
DN40 - - - 23.6 - - - - -
DN50 - - - - 28.1 - - - -
DN80 - - - - - 36 - - -
PN63
DN50 - - - - 28.1 - - - -
DN80 - - - - - 36 - - -
PN100
DN15 12.9 13.9 - - - - - - -
DN25 - - 20.1 - - - - - -
DN40 - - - 23.6 - - - - -
DN50 - - - - 28.1 - - - -
DN80 - - - - - 36 - - -
Page 55 of 307
inches
H08 H10 H15 H25 H50 H80 D100 D150 D200

PN160
DN15 12.9 13.9 - - - - - - -
DN25 - - 20.1 - - - - - -
DN40 - - - 23.6 - - - - -
DN50 - - - - 28.1 - - - -
DN80 - - - - - 36 41 - -
DN100 - - - - - - 42.1 49.2 -
DN150 - - - - - - - 51.4 67.6
DN200 - - - - - - - - 68.6
ASME 150
½¨ 12.9 13.9 - - - - - - -
1¨ - - 20.1 - - - - - -
1½¨ - - - 23.6 - - - - -
2¨ - - - - 28.1 - - - -
3¨ - - - - - 36 - - -
ASME 300
½¨ 12.9 13.9 - - - - - - -
1¨ - - 20.1 - - - - - -
1½¨ - - - 23.6 - - - - -
2¨ - - - - 28.1 - - - -
3¨ - - - - - 36 - - -
ASME 600
½¨ 12.9 13.9 - - - - - - -
1¨ - - 20.1 - - - - - -
1½¨ - - - 23.6 - - - - -
2¨ - - - - 28.1 - - - -
3¨ - - - - - 36 - - -
ASME 900
1½¨ - - - 23.6 - - - - -
2¨ - - - - 28.1 - - - -
3¨ - - - - - 36 42.7 - -
4¨ - - - - - - 43.7 50.9 -
6¨ - - - - - - - 52.7 69
8¨ - - - - - - - - 70.8
ASME 1500
½¨ 12.9 13.9 - - - - - - -
1¨ - - 20.1 - - - - - -
1½¨ - - - 23.6 - - - - -
2¨ - - - - 28.1 - - - -
3¨ - - - - - 36 44 - -
4¨ - - - - - - 44.5 51.6 -
Page 56 of 307
inches
H08 H10 H15 H25 H50 H80 D100 D150 D200

6¨ - - - - - - - 55.3 71.6
8¨ - - - - - - - - 74.8
JIS 10K
50A - - - - 28.1 - - - -
80A - - - - - 36 - - -
JIS 20K
15A 12.9 13.9 - - - - - - -
25A - - 20.1 - - - - - -
40A - - - 23.6 - - - - -
50A - - - - 28.1 - - - -
80A - - - - - 36 - - -
Page 57 of 307
2.4.2 NAMUR dimensions

The following face to face dimensions comply with NAMUR NE132
mm (±3)
S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S250

PN10
DN250 - - - - - - 2100
PN16
DN100 - - - - 1000 - -
DN150 - - - - - 1200 -
DN200 - - - - - - 2100
PN40
DN 15 510 - - - - - -
DN 25 - 600 - - - - -
DN 50 - - 715 - - - -
DN 80 - - - 915 - - -
inches (±0.12)
S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S250

PN10
DN250 - - - - - - 82.7
PN16
DN100 - - - - 39.4 - -
DN150 - - - - - 47.2 -
DN200 - - - - - - 82.7
PN40
DN 15 20.1 - - - - - -
DN 25 - 23.6 - - - - -
DN 50 - - 28.1 - - - -
DN 80 - - - 36 - - -
Page 58 of 307
2.4.3 Hygienic versions

mm (±5)
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80

Tri-clover
½¨ 308 320 - - - -
1¨ - - 477 - - -
1½¨ - - - 563 - -
2¨ - - - - 662 -
3¨ - - - - - 842
Tri-clamp DIN 32676
DN15 301 313 - - - -
DN25 - - 477 - - -
DN40 - - - 563 - -
DN50 - - - - 662 -
DN80 - - - - - 855
Tri-clamp ISO 2852
1¨ - - 483 - - -
1½¨ - - - 569 - -
2¨ - - - - 668 -
3¨ - - - - - 848
DIN 11864-2 Form A (female)
DN15 345 357 - - - -
DN25 - - 514 - - -
DN40 - - - 610 - -
DN50 - - - - 709 -
DN80 - - - - - 915
Page 59 of 307
mm (±5)
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80

Male thread DIN 11851
DN15 307 319 - - - -
DN25 - - 492 - - -
DN40 - - - 586 - -
DN50 - - - - 689 -
DN80 - - - - - 889
Male thread SMS
1¨ - - 464 - - -
1½¨ - - - 566 - -
2¨ - - - - 665 -
3¨ - - - - - 847
inches (±0.2)
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80

Tri-clover
½¨ 12.1 12.6 - - - -
1¨ - - 18.8 - - -
1½¨ - - - 22.2 - -
2¨ - - - - 26 -
3¨ - - - - - 33.1
Tri-clamp DIN 32676
DN15 11.8 12.3 - - - -
DN25 - - 18.8 - - -
DN40 - - - 22.2 - -
DN50 - - - - 26 -
DN80 - - - - - 33.7
Tri-clamp ISO 2852
1¨ - - 19 - - -
1½¨ - - - 22.4 - -
2¨ - - - - 26.3 -
3¨ - - - - - 33.4
DN15 13.6 14 - - - -
DN25 - - 20.2 - - -
DN40 - - - 24 - -
DN50 - - - - 27.9 -
DN80 - - - - - 36
Page 60 of 307
inches (±0.2)
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80

DN15 12 12.5 - - - -
DN25 - - 19.4 - - -
DN40 - - - 23 - -
DN50 - - - - 27.1 -
DN80 - - - - - 35
Male thread SMS
1¨ - - 18.3 - - -
1½¨ - - - 22.3 - -
2¨ - - - - 26.2 -
3¨ - - - - - 33.3
Page 61 of 307
2.4.4 Heating jacket version
General dimensions
mm
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250
Heating connection size: PN40 DN15 or ASME 150 ½¨

A ±5.0 435 590 692 715 891 956 1139 TBA TBA
B ±3.0 283 440 542 565 741 806 989 TBA TBA
C ±3.0 100 130 210 230 320 340 450 TBA TBA
D ±3.0 315 344 453 499 622 682 844 TBA TBA
E ±3.0 198 221 316 356 451 486 617 TBA TBA
F ±3.0 232 226 254 266 322 372 428 TBA TBA
inches
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250

A ±0.2 17.1 23.2 27.2 28.1 35.1 37.6 44.8 TBA TBA
B ±0.12 11.1 17.3 21.3 22.2 29.2 31.7 38.9 TBA TBA
C ±0.12 3.9 5.1 8.3 9 12.6 13.4 17.7 TBA TBA
D ±0.12 12.4 13.5 17.8 19.6 24.5 26.8 33.2 TBA TBA
E ±0.12 7.8 8.7 12.4 14 17.7 19.1 24.3 TBA TBA
F ±0.12 9.1 8.9 10 10.5 12.7 14.6 16.8 TBA TBA
Page 62 of 307
2.4.5 Purge port option
Dimensions
mm
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250
A 70 110 145 150 205 220 345 600 800
B 32 45 57 60 85 100 160 140
inches
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250
A 2.7 4.3 5.7 5.9 8.1 8.7 13.6 23.6 31.5
B 1.3 1.8 2.2 2.4 3.3 3.9 6.3 5.5
Page 63 of 307
2.4.6 Burst disc option
Dimensions
mm
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250
A 76 92 135 57 74 175 160 220
B 38.5 62 0 0 0 0 0 60
inches
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250
A 3.0 3.6 5.3 2.2 2.9 6.9 6.3 8.7
B 1.52 2.4 0 0 0 0 0 2.4
Page 64 of 307
Installation
3 INSTALLATION OPTIMASS 6000
3.1 Intended use

This mass flowmeter is designed for the direct measurement of mass flow rate, product density
and product temperature. Indirectly, it also enables the measurement of parameters like total
mass, concentration of dissolved substances and the volume flow. For use in hazardous areas,
special codes and regulations are also applicable and these are specified in a separate
documentation.
3.2 Mounting restrictions

3.2.1 General installation principles
There are no special installation requirements but you should note the following
points:
• Support the weight of the meter as close to the meter body as possible.
• Mount the meter in such a way to avoid the build up of gas or liquid in the measuring tube.
• Straight runs either side of the meter are not required.
• The use of reducers and other fittings at flanges, including flexible hoses, is allowed but you
should take care to avoid cavitation.
• Avoid extreme pipe size reductions.
• Meters are not affected by crosstalk and can be mounted in series or in parallel.
• Avoid mounting the meter at the highest point in the pipeline where air / gas can collect.
Page 65 of 307
OPTIMASS 6000 INSTALLATION 3
Mounting positions
1 The meter can be mounted at an angle but it is recommended that the flow is uphill.
2 Avoid mounting the meter with the flow running downhill because it can cause siphoning. If the meter has to be mount-
ed with the flow running downhill, install an orifice plate or control valve downstream of the meter to maintain back-
pressure.
3 Horizontal mounting with flow running left to right.
4 Avoid mounting meter with long vertical runs after the meter as it can cause cavitation. Where the installation includes
a vertical run after the meter, install an orifice plate or control valve downstream to maintain backpressure.
5 The meter can be mounted vertically but it is recommended that the flow is uphill.
6 Avoid mounting the meter vertically with the flow running downhill. This can cause siphoning. If the meter has to be
installed this way, install an orifice plate or control valve downstream to maintain backpressure.
Comprehensive installation guidance is provided in the Handbook
Page 66 of 307
K K
KROHNE product overview

• Electromagnetic flowmeters
• Variable area flowmeters
• Ultrasonic flowmeters
•
© KROHNE 02/2013 - 4001894102 - TD OPTIMASS 6000 R02 en - Subject to change without notice.
Mass flowmeters
• Vortex flowmeters
• Flow controllers
• Level meters
• Temperature meters
• Pressure meters
• Analysis products
• Products and systems for the oil & gas industry
• Measuring systems for the marine industry
Head Office KROHNE Messtechnik GmbH

Ludwig-Krohne-Str. 5
47058 Duisburg (Germany)
Tel.:+49 (0)203 301 0
Fax:+49 (0)203 301 10389
info@krohne.de
The current list of all KROHNE contacts and addresses can be found at:
www.krohne.com
Page 67 of 307
MFC 400 Technical Datasheet
Signal converter for mass flowmeters

• High performance signal converter for all applications
• Stable in multi-phase applications due to Entrained Gas Management (EGM®)
• High developed diagnostic functions acc. to NAMUR NE 107
documentation for the flow sensor.
© KROHNE 06/2015 - 4002075704 - TD MFC 400 R04 en
Page 68 of 307
CONTENTS MFC 400
1 Product features 3
1.1 The high performance signal converter for all applications ........................................... 3
1.2 Options and variants......................................................................................................... 5
1.3 Signal converter/flow sensor combination possibilities ................................................. 6
1.4 Measuring principle.......................................................................................................... 6
2 Technical data 7
2.1 Technical data................................................................................................................... 7

2.2.1 Housing ................................................................................................................................. 18
2.2.2 Mounting plate, field housing ............................................................................................... 18
3 Installation 19
3.1 Intended use ................................................................................................................... 19

3.2 Installation specifications .............................................................................................. 19
3.3 Mounting of the compact version................................................................................... 19
3.4 Mounting the field housing, remote version .................................................................. 20
3.4.1 Pipe mounting ....................................................................................................................... 20
3.4.2 Wall mounting ....................................................................................................................... 21
4 Electrical connections 22
4.1 Safety instructions.......................................................................................................... 22

4.2 Connection diagram ....................................................................................................... 22
4.3 Grounding the flow sensor ............................................................................................. 23
4.4 Connecting power – all housing variants....................................................................... 24
4.5 Inputs and outputs, overview ......................................................................................... 25
4.5.1 Combinations of the inputs/outputs (I/Os) ........................................................................... 25
4.5.2 Description of the CG number .............................................................................................. 26
4.5.3 Fixed, non-alterable input/output versions.......................................................................... 27
4.5.4 Alterable input/output versions............................................................................................ 29
5 Notes 30
2 www.krohne.com 06/2015 - 4002075704 - TD MFC 400 R04 en
Page 69 of 307
MFC 400 PRODUCT FEATURES 1
1.1 The high performance signal converter for all applications

The MFC 400 Coriolis mass flow signal converter will provide the highest performance possible
across a wide range of applications. For the measurement of liquids or gases, cryogenic to high
temperature fluids, single or multi-phase fluids and advanced digital signal processing
techniques is used to give stable and accurate measurements of mass flow, density and
temperature.
Conforming to the NAMUR standard NE 107 for status and error handling, the MFC 400 features
enhanced meter diagnostics. This provides extensive self-checking of internal circuits and
information regarding the health of the measuring sensor, but just as importantly, vital
information about the process and process conditions.
(signal converter in field housing)
1 Communication with any third party system possible via Foundation Fieldbus, Profibus PA/DP or Modbus
2 Intuitive navigation and a wide variety of languages integrated as standard for ease of operation
3 Supply voltage: 100...230 VAC (standard) and 24 VDC or 24 VAC/DC (optional)
06/2015 - 4002075704 - TD MFC 400 R04 en www.krohne.com 3
Page 70 of 307
1 PRODUCT FEATURES MFC 400
Highlights
• High performance signal converter with multiple output options
• Advanced diagnostic functions acc. to NE 107
• With Entrained Gas Management (EGMTM) – the new standard for entrained gas immunity
• Excellent long-term stability
• Easy to install and program due to improved user interface
• Optical and mechanical keys for ease of use
• Redundant data storage in signal converter housing
• Real time clock for logging events
• HART® 7
Industries
• Water & Wastewater
• Chemicals
• Power plants
• Food & Beverage
• Machinery
• Oil & Gas
• Petrochemical
• Pulp & Paper
• Pharmaceutical
• Marine
Applications
• Liquids and gases
• Liquids with gas entrainment
• Slurries and viscous products
• Concentration measurement for quality control
• Measurement of volume flow
• Measurement of density and reference density
• Custody transfer loading/unloading
• Custody transfer measurements
Page 71 of 307
MFC 400 PRODUCT FEATURES 1
1.2 Options and variants

Compact design for standard applications
The MFC 400 mass flow signal converter is available
in different variants and offers superior
performance in any conceivable application. From
process control in chemistry, to density and
concentration measurements in the food and
beverage industry, to custody transfer filling and
transport measurements for oil and gas right down
to conveyor systems in the pulp and paper industry.
Coriolis mass flow measuring systems measure the

mass and volume flow, the density and the
temperature of liquids and gases. In addition, the
(Example: OPTIMASS 6400 – compact) concentration in mixtures and slurries can also be
determined.
Thanks to Entrained Gas Management (EGMTM) the

MFC 400 systems offer high performance with air
entrainment, delivering continuous measurement
even with 0...100% gas entrainment.
For standard applications the compact housing is

mounted directly on the measuring sensor. In the
unlikely event of a failure, the electronics can be
easily exchanged and reconfigured using a backup
data set that is stored in the housing.
(Example: OPTIMASS 2400 – compact)
Remote field housing version

The signal converter in the robust field housing is
generally used when it is difficult to access the
measuring point or when ambient conditions do not
allow the use of the compact version.
(signal converter in field housing)
Page 72 of 307
1 PRODUCT FEATURES MFC 400
1.3 Signal converter/flow sensor combination possibilities
Flow sensor Flow sensor + signal converter MFC 400
Compact Remote field housing

OPTIMASS 1000 OPTIMASS 1400 C OPTIMASS 1400 F
1.4 Measuring principle

The signal converter has been designed to work with all the measuring tube designs used in the
mass flowmeters. For information regarding the measuring principle for a specific measuring
tube design, please refer to the technical documentation of the relevant flow sensor.
Page 73 of 307
MFC 400 TECHNICAL DATA 2
2.1 Technical data

documentation can be downloaded free of charge from the website (Downloadcenter).
Measuring system
Measuring principle Coriolis principle
Application range Measurement of mass flow, density, temperature, volume flow, flow velocity,
concentration
Design
Modular construction The measuring system consists of a flow sensor and a signal converter.
Flow sensor
OPTIMASS 1000 DN15…50 / ½…2"
OPTIMASS 2000 DN100…250 / 4...10"
OPTIMASS 3000 DN01…04 / 1/25...4/25"
OPTIMASS 6000 DN08…250 / 3/8...10"
OPTIMASS 7000 DN06…80 / ¼…3"
All flow sensors are also available in an Ex version.
Signal converter
Compact version (C) OPTIMASS x400 C (x = 1, 2, 3, 6 or 7)
Field housing (F) - MFC 400 F
remote version
Compact and field housing versions are also available in an Ex version.
Options
Outputs / inputs Current output (incl. HART®), pulse output, frequency output, and/or status output,
limit switch and/or control input (depending on the I/O version)
Totaliser 2 (optional 3) internal totalisers with a max. of 8 counter places (e.g. for counting
volume and/or mass units)
Verification Integrated verification, diagnostic functions: measuring device, process, measured
value, stabilisation
Concentration measurement Universal concentration measurement, °Brix, °Baume, °Plato, alcohol
concentration, NaOH and API density
Communication interfaces Foundation Fieldbus, Profibus PA and DP, Modbus, HART®
Page 74 of 307
2 TECHNICAL DATA MFC 400
Display and user interface

Graphic display LC display, backlit white.
Size: 128 x 64 pixels, corresponds to 59 x 31 mm = 2.32" x 1.22"
Display turnable in 90° steps.
Ambient temperatures below -25°C / -13°F may affect the readability of the display.
Operating elements 4 push buttons/optical keys for operator control of the signal converter without
opening the housing.
Infrared interface for reading and writing all parameters with IR interface (option)
without opening the housing.
Remote operation PACTwareTM (incl. Device Type Manager (DTM))
HART® Hand Held Communicator from Emerson Process
AMS® from Emerson Process
PDM® from Siemens
All DTMs and drivers are available free of charge from the manufacturer's website.
Display functions
Operating menu Setting the parameters using 2 measuring pages, 1 status page, 1 graphic page
(measured values and graphics are freely adjustable)
Language display texts (as Standard: English, French, German, Dutch, Portuguese, Swedish, Spanish, Italian
language package)
Eastern Europe (in preparation): English, Slovenian, Czech, Hungarian
Northern Europe: English, Danish, Polish
Southern Europe: English, Turkish
China (in preparation): English, Chinese
Russia: English, Russian
Measurement functions Units: Metric, British and US units selectable as desired from lists for volume/mass
flow and counting, velocity, temperature, pressure
Measured values: Mass flow, total mass, temperature, density, volume flow, total
volume, velocity, flow direction (not displayed unit – but available via outputs), BRIX,
Baume, NaOH, Plato, API, mass concentration, volume concentration
Diagnostic functions Standards: VDI / NAMUR / WIB 2650 and NE 107
Status messages: Output of status messages optional via display, current and/or
status output, HART® or bus interface
Sensor diagnosis: Sensor values, drive level, measuring tube frequency, 2 phase
signal, drive coil impedance, insulation fault, circuit interruption, exceeding the
maximum flow, process temperature
Self-diagnosing sensor electronics: Electronics temperature, input gains, driver
amplifier
Signal converter and inputs/outputs: Data bus monitoring, current output
connections, electronics temperature, voltage drop, parameter and data integrity
Page 75 of 307
Measuring accuracy
Reference conditions Medium: water
Temperature: +20°C / +68°F
Pressure: 1 bar / 14.5 psi
Maximum measuring error Refer to technical data for the flow sensor.
Current output electronics ±5 µA
Temperature
Process temperature Refer to technical data for the flow sensor.
Ambient temperature Depending on the version and combination of outputs.
It is a good idea to protect the signal converter from external heat sources such as
direct sunlight as higher temperatures reduce the life cycle of all electronic
components.
-40…+65°C / -40…+149°F
Stainless steel housing: -40…+60°C / -40…+140°F
Storage temperature -50…+70°C / -58…+158°F
Pressure
Medium Refer to technical data for the flow sensor.
Ambient pressure Atmospheric
Chemical properties
State of aggregation Liquids, gases and slurries
Flow rate Refer to technical data for the flow sensor.
Other conditions
Ingress protection acc. to IP66/67 (acc. to NEMA 4/4X)
IEC 529 / EN 60529
Installation For detailed information, refer to chapter "Installation conditions".
Dimensions and weights For detailed information refer to chapter "Dimensions and weights".
Page 76 of 307
Materials
Signal converter housing Standard: die-cast aluminium (polyurethane coated)
Option: stainless steel 316 (1.4408)
Flow sensor For housing material, process connections, measuring tubes, accessories and
gaskets, refer to technical data for the flow sensor.
Electrical connection
General Electrical connection is carried out in conformity with the VDE 0100 directive
"Regulations for electrical power installations with line voltages up to 1000 V" or
equivalent national specifications.
Power supply Standard: 100…230 VAC (-15% / +10%), 50/60 Hz
Option 1: 24 VDC (-55% / +30%)
Option 2: 24 VAC/DC (AC: -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz; DC: -25% / +30%)
Power consumption AC: 22 VA
DC: 12 W
Signal cable Only for remote versions.
10 core shielded cable. Detailed specifications are available on request.
Length: max. 20 m / 65.6 ft
Cable entries Standard: M20.5 (8...12 mm)
Option: ½ NPT, PF ½
Page 77 of 307
Inputs and outputs

General All outputs are electrically isolated from each other and from all other circuits.
All operating data and output values can be adjusted.
Description of abbreviations Uext = external voltage; RL = load + resistance;
U0 = terminal voltage; Inom = nominal current
Safety limit values (Ex i):
Ui = max. input voltage; Ii = max. input current; Pi = max. input power rating;
Ci = max. input capacity; Li = max. input inductivity
Current output
Output data Volume flow, mass flow, temperature, density, flow velocity, diagnostic value, 2-
phase signal
Concentration and concentration flow are also possible with available concentration
measurement (optional).
Temperature coefficient Typically ±30 ppm/K
Settings Without HART®
Q = 0%: 0…20 mA; Q = 100%: 10…20 mA
Error identification: selectable 3…22 mA
With HART®
Q = 0%: 4…20 mA; Q = 100%: 10…20 mA
Operating data Basic I/Os Modular I/Os Ex i
Active Uint, nom = 24 VDC Uint, nom = 20 VDC
I ≤ 22 mA I ≤ 22 mA
RL ≤ 1 kΩ RL ≤ 450 Ω
U0 = 21 V
I0 = 90 mA
P0 = 0.5 W
C0 = 90 nF / L0 = 2 mH
C0 = 110 nF / L0 = 0.5 mH
Passive Uext ≤ 32 VDC Uext ≤ 32 VDC
I ≤ 22 mA I ≤ 22 mA
U0 ≥ 1.8 V U0 ≥ 4 V
RL ≤ (Uext - U0) / Imax RL ≤ (Uext - U0) / Imax

Ui = 30 V
Ii = 100 mA
Pi = 1 W
Ci = 10 nF
Li ~ 0 mH
Page 78 of 307
HART®
Description HART® protocol via active and passive current output
HART® version: V7
Universal HART® parameter: completely integrated
Load ≥ 250 Ω at HART® test point;
Note maximum load for current output!
Multidrop operation Yes, current output = 10%, e.g. 4 mA
Multi-drop address adjustable in operation menu 0...63
Device drivers Available for FC 375/475, AMS, PDM, FDT/DTM
Registration (HART Yes
Communication Foundation)
Pulse output or frequency output
Output data Pulse output: volume flow, mass flow, mass or volume of dissolved substance
during activated concentration measurement
Frequency output: flow velocity, mass flow, temperature, density, diagnostic value
Optional: concentration, flow of the dissolved substance
Function Can be set as a pulse output or frequency output
Pulse rate/frequency 0.01...10000 pulses/s or Hz
Settings Mass or volume per pulse or max. frequency for 100% flow
Pulse width: adjustable as automatic, symmetric or fixed (0.05...2000 ms)
Active - Unom = 24 VDC -
fmax in operating menu set
to fmax ≤ 100 Hz:
I ≤ 20 mA
open:
I ≤ 0.05 mA
closed:
U0, nom = 24 V
at I = 20 mA
to 100 Hz < fmax ≤ 10 kHz:
I ≤ 20 mA
open:
I ≤ 0.05 mA
closed:
U0, nom = 22.5 V
at I = 1 mA
U0, nom = 21.5 V
at I = 10 mA
U0, nom = 19 V
at I = 20 mA
Page 79 of 307
Passive Uext ≤ 32 VDC -

fmax in operating menu set to
fmax ≤ 100 Hz:
I ≤ 100 mA
open:
I ≤ 0.05 mA at Uext = 32 VDC
closed:
U0, max = 0.2 V at I ≤ 10 mA
U0, max = 2 V at I ≤ 100 mA
100 Hz < fmax ≤ 10 kHz:
I ≤ 20 mA
open:
closed:
U0, max = 1.5 V at I ≤ 1 mA
U0, max = 2.5 V at I ≤ 10 mA
U0, max = 5.0 V at I ≤ 20 mA
NAMUR - Passive to EN 60947-5-6 Passive to EN 60947-5-6
open: open:
Inom = 0.6 mA Inom = 0.43 mA
closed: closed:
Ui = 30 V
Ii = 100 mA
Pi = 1 W
Ci =10 nF
Li ~ 0 mH
Low flow cut off
Function Switching point and hysteresis separately adjustable for each output, counter and
the display
Switching point Set in increments of 0.1%.
0…20% (current output, frequency output)
Hysteresis Set in increments of 0.1%.
Time constant
Function The time constant corresponds to the elapsed time until 67% of the end value has
been reached according to a step function.
Settings Set in increments of 0.1 seconds.
0…100 seconds
Page 80 of 307
Status output / limit switch

Function and settings Adjustable as automatic measuring range conversion, display of flow direction,
overflow, error or switching point.
Valve control with activated dosing function
Status and/or control: ON or OFF
Active - Uint = 24 VDC -
I ≤ 20 mA
open:
I ≤ 0.05 mA
closed:
U0, nom = 24 V
at I = 20 mA
Passive Uext ≤ 32 VDC Uext ≤ 32 VDC -
I ≤ 100 mA I ≤ 100 mA
open: RL, max = 47 kΩ

I ≤ 0.05 mA at RL, min = (Uext - U0) / Imax
Uext = 32 VDC
open:
closed: I ≤ 0.05 mA
U0, max = 0.2 V at Uext = 32 VDC
at I ≤ 10 mA
U0, max = 2 V closed:
at I ≤ 100 mA U0, max = 0.2 V
at I ≤ 10 mA
U0, max = 2 V
at I ≤ 100 mA
open: open:
closed: closed:
Ui = 30 V
Ii = 100 mA
Pi = 1 W
Ci =10 nF
Li = 0 mH
Page 81 of 307
Control input
Function Hold value of the outputs (e.g. for cleaning work), set value of the outputs to "zero",
counter and error reset, stop counter, range conversion, zero calibration
Start of dosing when dosing function is activated.
Ext. contact open:

U0, nom = 22 V
Ext. contact closed:

Inom = 4 mA
Contact open (Off):

U0 ≥ 12 V
with Inom = 1.9 mA
Contact closed (On):

U0 ≤ 10 V
with Inom = 1.9 mA
Passive 8 V ≤ Uext ≤ 32 VDC 3 V ≤ Uext ≤ 32 VDC Uext ≤ 32 VDC
Imax = 6.5 mA Imax = 9.5 mA I ≤ 6 mA at Uext = 24 V

at Uext ≤ 24 VDC at Uext ≤ 24 V I ≤ 6.6 mA at Uext = 32 V
Imax = 8.2 mA Imax = 9.5 mA
at Uext ≤ 32 VDC at Uext ≤ 32 V On:
U0 ≥ 5.5 V or I ≥ 4 mA
Contact closed (On): Contact closed (On):
U0 ≥ 8 V U0 ≥ 3 V Off:
with Inom = 2.8 mA with Inom = 1.9 mA U0 ≤ 3.5 V or I ≤ 0.5 mA
Ui = 30 V
Contact open (Off): Contact open (Off): Ii = 100 mA
U0 ≤ 2.5 V U0 ≤ 2.5 V
Pi = 1 W
with Inom = 0.4 mA with Inom = 1.9 mA
Ci = 10 nF
Li = 0 mH
NAMUR - Active to EN 60947-5-6 -
Terminals open:
U0, nom = 8.7 V

U0, nom = 6.3 V
with Inom > 1.9 mA
Contact open (Off):

U0, nom = 6.3 V
with Inom < 1.9 mA
Detection of cable break:

U0 ≥ 8.1 V
with I ≤ 0.1 mA
Detection of cable short

circuit:
U0 ≤ 1.2 V
with I ≥ 6.7 mA
Page 82 of 307
PROFIBUS DP
Description Galvanically isolated acc. to IEC 61158
Profile version: 3.02
Automatic data transmission rate recognition (max. 12 MBaud)
Bus address adjustable via local display at the measuring device
Function blocks 8 x analogue input, 3 x totaliser
Output data Mass flow, volume flow, mass counter 1 + 2, volume counter, product temperature,
several concentration measurements and diagnostic data
PROFIBUS PA
Current consumption: 10.5 mA
Permissible bus voltage: 9…32 V; in Ex application: 9...24 V
Bus interface with integrated reverse polarity protection
Typical error current FDE (Fault Disconnection Electronic): 4.3 mA
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Link Master function (LM) supported
Tested with Interoperable Test Kit (ITK) version 6.01
Function blocks 6 x analogue input, 2 x integrator, 1 x PID
Output data Mass flow, volume flow, density, temperature of tube, several concentration
measurements and diagnostic data
Modbus
Description Modbus RTU, Master/Slave, RS485
Address range 1…247
Supported function codes 01, 03, 04, 05, 08, 16, 43
Supported Baudrate 1200, 2400, 3600, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 Baud
Page 83 of 307
Approvals and certificates

CE The device fulfils the statutory requirements of the EC directives. The manufacturer
certifies that these requirements have been met by applying the CE marking.
Non-Ex Standard
Hazardous areas
Option (C version only)
ATEX II 1/2 (1) G - Ex d ia [ia Ga] IIC T6…T1 Ga/Gb
II 1/2 (1) G - Ex de ia [ia Ga] IIC T6…T1 Ga/Gb
II 2 (1) G - Ex d ia [ia Ga] IIC T6…T1 Gb
II 2 (1) G - Ex de ia [ia Ga] IIC T6…T1 Gb
II 2 (1) D - Ex t [ia Da] IIIC Txxx°C Db
II 1/2 G - Ex d ia IIC T6…T1 Ga/Gb; II 1/2 G - Ex de ia IIC T6…T1 Ga/Gb
II 2 G - Ex d ia IIC T6…T1 Gb; II 2 G - Ex de ia IIC T6…T1 Gb
II 2 D - Ex t IIIC Txxx°C Db
Option (F version only)
ATEX II 2 (1) G - Ex d [ia Ga] IIC T6 Gb
II 2 (1) G - Ex de [ia Ga] IIC T6 Gb
II 2 (1) D - Ex t [ia Da] IIIC T75°C Db
II 2 G - Ex d [ia] IIC T6 Gb; II 2 G - Ex de [ia] IIC T6 Gb
II 2 D - Ex t IIIC T75°C Db
NEPSI Ex d ia [ia Ga] IIC T6…T1 Ga/Gb; Ex de ia [ia Ga] IIC T6…T1 Ga/Gb
Option
FM / CSA FM: Class I, Div 1 groups A, B, C, D
CSA: Class I, Div 1 groups C, D
Class II, Div 1 groups E, F, G
Class III, Div 1 hazardous areas
FM: Class I, Div 2 groups A, B, C, D
IECEx Ex zone 1 + 2
Custody transfer
Without Standard
Option Liquids other than water 2004/22/EC (MID MI005) acc. to OIML R 117-1
Gases 2004/22/EC (MID MI002) acc. to OIML R 137
Other standards and approvals
Shock and vibration resistance IEC 68-2-3
Electromagnetic compatibility 2004/108/EC in conjunction with EN 61326-1 (A1, A2)
(EMC)
European pressure equipment PED 97/23/EC
directive
NAMUR NE 21, NE 43, NE 53, NE 107
Page 84 of 307

2.2.1 Housing
Figure 2-1: Dimensions for field housing (F) - remote version
Dimensions [mm / inch] Weight [kg /

lb]
a b c g h
202 / 7.75 120 / 4.75 155 / 6.10 295.8 / 11.60 277 / 10.90 5.7 / 12.60
2.2.2 Mounting plate, field housing
Dimensions in mm and inch

[mm] [inch]
a 72 2.8
b 72 2.8
c Ø9 Ø0.4
Page 85 of 307
MFC 400 INSTALLATION 3
3.1 Intended use

The mass flowmeters are designed exclusively to directly measure mass flow rates, product
density and temperature as well to indirectly measure parameters such as the total volume and
concentration of dissolved substances as well as the volume flow rate.
For devices used in hazardous areas, additional safety notes apply; please refer to the Ex
documentation.
If the device is not used according to the operating conditions (refer to chapter Technical data),
the intended protection could be affected.
3.2 Installation specifications

The following precautions must be taken to ensure reliable installation.
• Make sure that there is adequate space to the sides.
• Protect the signal converter from direct sunlight and install a sun shade if necessary.
• Signal converters installed in control cabinets require adequate cooling, e.g. by fan or heat
exchanger.
• Do not expose the signal converter to intense vibrations. The measuring devices are tested
for a vibration level in accordance with IEC 68-2-64.
3.3 Mounting of the compact version

The signal converter is mounted directly on the flow sensor. For installation of the flowmeter,
please observe the instructions in the supplied product documentation for the flow sensor.
Page 86 of 307
3 INSTALLATION MFC 400
3.4 Mounting the field housing, remote version

Remarks for sanitary applications
• To prevent contamination and dirt deposits behind the mounting plate, a cover plug must be
installed between the wall and the mounting plate.
• Pipe mounting is not suitable for sanitary applications!
Assembly materials and tools are not part of the delivery. Use the assembly materials and tools
in compliance with the applicable occupational health and safety directives.
3.4.1 Pipe mounting
Figure 3-1: Pipe mounting of the field housing
1 Fix the signal converter to the pipe.

2 Fasten the signal converter using standard U-bolts and washers.
3 Tighten the nuts.
Page 87 of 307
3.4.2 Wall mounting
Figure 3-2: Wall mounting of the field housing
1 Prepare the holes with the aid of the mounting plate. For further information refer to Mounting
plate, field housing on page 18.
2 Fasten the mounting plate securely to the wall.
3 Screw the signal converter to the mounting plate with the nuts and washers.
Mounting multiple devices next to each other
a ≥ 600 mm / 23.6"
b ≥ 250 mm / 9.8"
Page 88 of 307
4 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS MFC 400
4.1 Safety instructions

All work on the electrical connections may only be carried out with the power disconnected. Take
note of the voltage data on the nameplate!
Observe the national regulations for electrical installations!
documentation.
Observe without fail the local occupational health and safety regulations. Any work done on the
electrical components of the measuring device may only be carried out by properly trained
specialists.
Look at the device nameplate to ensure that the device is delivered according to your order.
Check for the correct supply voltage printed on the nameplate.
4.2 Connection diagram

The device must be grounded in accordance with regulations in order to protect personnel
against electric shocks.
Figure 4-1: Connection diagram

1 Terminal compartment for signal converter
2 Terminal compartment for measuring sensor
3 Connect shielding to spring terminal (drain wire and overall shield)
Page 89 of 307
MFC 400 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 4
Cable Cable Connection terminal
Cable pair Colour

1 yellow X1 SA+
1 black X1 SA-
2 green X1 SB+
2 black X1 SB-
3 blue X2 T1
3 black X2 T2
4 red X2 T3
4 black X2 T4
5 white X3 DR+
5 black X3 DR-
4.3 Grounding the flow sensor

There should be no difference in potential between the flow sensor and the housing or protective
earth of the signal converter!
• The flow sensor must be properly grounded.

• The grounding cable should not transmit any interference voltages.
• Do not use the grounding cable to connect more than one device to ground.
• The flow sensors are connected to ground by means of a functional grounding conductor FE.
• In hazardous areas, grounding is used at the same time for equipotential bonding. Additional
grounding instructions are provided in the supplementary "Ex documentation", which are
only supplied together with hazardous area equipment.
Page 90 of 307
4.4 Connecting power – all housing variants

documentation.
• The protection category depends on the housing versions (IP65...67 to IEC 529 / EN 60529 or
NEMA4/4X/6).
• The housings of the devices, which are designed to protect the electronic equipment from
dust and moisture, should be kept well closed at all times. Creepage distances and
clearances are dimensioned to VDE 0110 and IEC 664 for pollution severity 2. Supply circuits
are designed for overvoltage category III and the output circuits for overvoltage category II.
• Fuse protection (IN ≤ 16 A) for the infeed power circuit, as well as a separator (switch, circuit
breaker) to isolate the signal converter must be provided close to the device. The separator
must be marked as the separator for this device.
100...230 VAC (tolerance range: -15% / +10%)

• Note the power supply voltage and frequency (50...60 Hz) on the nameplate.
• The protective ground terminal PE of the power supply must be connected to the separate U-
clamp terminal in the terminal compartment of the signal converter
240 VAC + 5% is included in the tolerance range.
24 VDC (tolerance range: -55% / +30%)

24 VAC/DC (tolerance range: AC: -15% / +10%; DC: -25% / +30%)
• Note the data on the nameplate!
• For measurement process reasons, a functional ground FE must be connected to the
separate U-clamp terminal in the terminal compartment of the signal converter.
• When connecting to functional extra-low voltages, provide a facility for protective separation
(PELV) (acc. to VDE 0100 / VDE 0106 and/or IEC 364 / IEC 536 or relevant national
regulations).
For 24 VDC, 12 VDC - 10% is included in the tolerance range.
Power supply connection
1 100...230 VAC (-15% / +10%), 22 VA

2 24 VDC (-55% / +30%), 12 W
3 24 VAC/DC (AC: -15% / +10%; DC: -25% / +30%), 22 VA or 12 W
Page 91 of 307
4.5 Inputs and outputs, overview

4.5.1 Combinations of the inputs/outputs (I/Os)
This signal converter is available with various input/output combinations.
Basic version
• Has 1 current output, 1 pulse output and 2 status outputs / limit switches.
• The pulse output can be set as status output/limit switch and one of the status outputs as a
control input.
Ex i version
• Depending on the task, the device can be configured with various output modules.
• Current outputs can be active or passive.
• Optionally available also with Foundation Fieldbus and Profibus PA
Modular version
Bus systems
• The device allows intrinsically safe and non intrinsically safe bus interfaces in combination
with additional modules.
• For connection and operation of bus systems, note the supplementary instructions.
Ex option
• For hazardous areas, all of the input/output variants for the housing designs C and F can be
delivered with terminal compartment in Ex d (pressure-resistant casing) or Ex e (increased
safety).
• For connection and operation of Ex devices, note the supplementary instructions.
Page 92 of 307
4.5.2 Description of the CG number
Figure 4-2: Marking (CG number) of the electronics module and input/output variants
1 ID number: 3
2 ID number: 0 = standard; 9 = special
3 Power supply option
4 Display (language versions)
5 Input/output version (I/O)
6 1st optional module for connection terminal A
7 2nd optional module for connection terminal B
The last 3 digits of the CG number (5, 6 and 7) indicate the assignment of the terminal
connections. Please refer to the following examples.
Examples for CG number

CG 330 11 100 100...230 VAC & standard display; basic I/O: Ia or Ip & Sp/Cp & Sp & Pp/Sp
CG 330 11 7FK 100...230 VAC & standard display; modular I/O: Ia & PN/SN and optional module PN/SN & CN
CG 330 81 4EB 24 VDC & standard display; modular I/O: Ia & Pa/Sa and optional module Pp/Sp & Ip
Description of abbreviations and CG identifier for possible optional modules

on terminals A and B
Abbreviation Identifier for CG No. Description
Ia A Active current output
Ip B Passive current output
Pa / Sa C Active pulse output, frequency output, status output or limit switch
(changeable)
Pp / Sp E Passive pulse output, frequency output, status output or limit switch
(changeable)
PN / SN F Passive pulse output, frequency output, status output or limit switch acc.
to NAMUR (changeable)
Ca G Active control input
Cp K Passive control input
CN H Active control input to NAMUR
Signal converter monitors cable breaks and short circuits acc. to
EN 60947-5-6. Errors indicated on LC display. Error messages possible
via status output.
- 8 No additional module installed
- 0 No further module possible
Page 93 of 307
4.5.3 Fixed, non-alterable input/output versions

• The grey boxes in the tables denote unassigned or unused connection terminals.
• In the table, only the final digits of the CG no. are depicted.
• Connection terminal A+ is only operable in the basic input/output version.
CG no. Connection terminals
A+ A A- B B- C C- D D-
Basic I/Os (standard)

100 Ip + HART® passive 1 Sp / Cp passive 2 Sp passive Pp / Sp passive 2
Ia + HART® active 1
Ex i I/Os (option)
200 Ia + HART® active PN / SN NAMUR 2
300 Ip + HART® passive PN / SN NAMUR 2
210 Ia active PN / SN NAMUR Ia + HART® active PN / SN NAMUR 2

Cp passive 2
310 Ia active PN / SN NAMUR Ip + HART® passive PN / SN NAMUR 2
Cp passive 2
220 Ip passive PN / SN NAMUR Ia + HART® active PN / SN NAMUR 2
Cp passive 2
320 Ip passive PN / SN NAMUR Ip + HART® passive PN / SN NAMUR 2
Cp passive 2
PROFIBUS PA (Ex i) (option)

D00 PA+ PA- PA+ PA-
FISCO Device FISCO Device
D10 Ia active PN / SN NAMUR PA+ PA- PA+ PA-
Cp passive 2 FISCO Device FISCO Device
D20 Ip passive PN / SN NAMUR PA+ PA- PA+ PA-
Page 94 of 307
FOUNDATION Fieldbus (Ex i) (option)

E00 V/D+ V/D- V/D+ V/D-
E10 Ia active PN / SN NAMUR V/D+ V/D- V/D+ V/D-
E20 Ip passive PN / SN NAMUR V/D+ V/D- V/D+ V/D-
1 Function changed by reconnecting
2 Changeable
Page 95 of 307
4.5.4 Alterable input/output versions

• Term. = (connection) terminal
Modular I/Os (option)

4__ max. 2 optional modules for term. A + B Ia + HART® active Pa / Sa active 1
8__ max. 2 optional modules for term. A + B Ip + HART® passive Pa / Sa active 1
6__ max. 2 optional modules for term. A + B Ia + HART® active Pp / Sp passive 1
B__ max. 2 optional modules for term. A + B Ip + HART® passive Pp / Sp passive 1
7__ max. 2 optional modules for term. A + B Ia + HART® active PN / SN NAMUR 1
C__ max. 2 optional modules for term. A + B Ip + HART® passive PN / SN NAMUR 1
PROFIBUS PA (option)
D__ max. 2 optional modules for term. A + B PA+ (2) PA- (2) PA+ (1) PA- (1)
FOUNDATION Fieldbus (option)

E__ max. 2 optional modules for term. A + B V/D+ (2) V/D- (2) V/D+ (1) V/D- (1)
PROFIBUS DP (option)
F_0 1 optional module for Termina- RxD/TxD- RxD/TxD- Termina- RxD/TxD- RxD/TxD-
term. A tion P P(2) N(2) tion N P(1) N(1)
Modbus (option)
G__ 2 max. 2 optional modules for term. A + B Common Sign. B Sign. A
(D1) (D0)
H__ 3 max. 2 optional modules for term. A + B Common Sign. B Sign. A
(D1) (D0)
1 Changeable
2 Not activated bus terminator
3 Activated bus terminator
Page 96 of 307
5 NOTES MFC 400
Page 97 of 307
MFC 400 NOTES 5
Page 98 of 307
K K
KROHNE – Process instrumentation and measurement solutions

• Flow
• Level
• Temperature
• Pressure
• Process Analysis
© KROHNE 06/2015 - 4002075704 - TD MFC 400 R04 en - Subject to change without notice.
• Services

Tel.: +49 203 301 0
Fax: +49 203 301 10389
info@krohne.com
www.krohne.com
Page 99 of 307
HN2172
MANUAL
VENDOR : KROHNE

Ship Class : ABS
Page 100 of 307

MA_OPTIMASS_6000_en_140717_4001894003_R03.book Page 1 Thursday, July 17, 2014 3:27 PM
OPTIMASS 6000 Handbook
Sensor for mass flow
documentation for the signal converter.
© KROHNE 07/2014 - 4001894003 - MA OPTIMASS 6000 R03 en
Page 101 of 307

: IMPRINT ::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: OPTIMASS 6000
All rights reserved. It is prohibited to reproduce this documentation, or any part thereof, without
the prior written authorisation of KROHNE Messtechnik GmbH.
Subject to change without notice.
Copyright 2014 by
KROHNE Messtechnik GmbH - Ludwig-Krohne-Str. 5 - 47058 Duisburg (Germany)
2 www.krohne.com 07/2014 - 4001894003 - MA OPTIMASS 6000 R03 en
Page 102 of 307

OPTIMASS 6000 CONTENTS
1 Safety instructions 5
1.1 Intended use ..................................................................................................................... 5

1.2 CE certification ................................................................................................................. 5
1.3 Associated documents ..................................................................................................... 5
1.4 Insulation case.................................................................................................................. 5
1.5 Pressure Equipment Directive (PED)............................................................................... 6
1.6 Dirty gas............................................................................................................................ 7
1.7 Safety instructions from the manufacturer ..................................................................... 7
1.7.1 Copyright and data protection ................................................................................................ 7
1.7.2 Disclaimer ............................................................................................................................... 7
1.7.3 Product liability and warranty ................................................................................................ 8
1.7.4 Information concerning the documentation........................................................................... 8
1.7.5 Warnings and symbols used................................................................................................... 9
1.8 Safety instructions for the operator................................................................................. 9
2 Device description 10
2.1 Scope of delivery............................................................................................................. 10

2.1.1 Meters with hygienic connections ........................................................................................ 11
2.2 Nameplates .................................................................................................................... 11
2.3 Dual Seal........................................................................................................................ 11
2.4 Temperature differential and thermal shock ................................................................ 12
3 Installation 14
3.1 General notes on installation ......................................................................................... 14

3.2 Storage ........................................................................................................................... 14
3.3 Handling.......................................................................................................................... 15
3.4 Installation conditions .................................................................................................... 16
3.4.1 Supporting the meter............................................................................................................ 16
3.4.2 Mounting the meter .............................................................................................................. 17
3.4.3 Gas / liquid build up .............................................................................................................. 18
3.4.4 Side mounting ....................................................................................................................... 18
3.4.5 Cross talk .............................................................................................................................. 19
3.4.6 Flange connections ............................................................................................................... 19
3.4.7 Maximum pipework forces (end loadings) ........................................................................... 20
3.4.8 Pipework reducers................................................................................................................ 20
3.4.9 Flexible connections ............................................................................................................. 21
3.4.10 Hygienic installations.......................................................................................................... 21
3.4.11 Heating and insulation ........................................................................................................ 22
3.4.12 Purge ports ......................................................................................................................... 23
3.4.13 Burst discs .......................................................................................................................... 23
3.4.14 Zero calibration ................................................................................................................... 24
3.4.15 Sunshades ........................................................................................................................... 24
07/2014 - 4001894003 - MA OPTIMASS 6000 R03 en www.krohne.com 3
Page 103 of 307

CONTENTS OPTIMASS 6000

4.2 Electrical and I/O connections ....................................................................................... 25
5 Service 26
5.1 Spare parts availability................................................................................................... 26

5.2 Availability of services .................................................................................................... 26
5.3 Returning the device to the manufacturer..................................................................... 26
5.3.1 General information.............................................................................................................. 26
5.3.2 Form (for copying) to accompany a returned device............................................................ 27
5.4 Disposal .......................................................................................................................... 27
6 Technical data 28
6.1 Measuring principle (twin tube) ..................................................................................... 28

6.2 Technical data................................................................................................................. 30
6.3 Measuring accuracy ....................................................................................................... 37
6.4 Guidelines for maximum operating pressure................................................................ 37
6.5.1 Flanged versions................................................................................................................... 42
6.5.2 NAMUR dimensions .............................................................................................................. 53
6.5.3 Hygienic versions .................................................................................................................. 54
6.5.4 Heating jacket version .......................................................................................................... 57
6.5.5 Purge port option .................................................................................................................. 58
6.5.6 Burst discs ............................................................................................................................ 58
6.5.7 Burst disc option ................................................................................................................... 59
Page 104 of 307

Safety instructions
OPTIMASS 6000 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1
1.1 Intended use

This mass flowmeter is designed for the direct measurement of mass flow rate, product density
and product temperature. Indirectly, it also enables the measurement of parameters like total
mass, concentration of dissolved substances and the volume flow. For use in hazardous areas,
special codes and regulations are also applicable and these are specified in a separate
documentation.
1.2 CE certification
CE marking
This device conforms with the following EC directives:
• EMC Directive 2004/108/EC

• ATEX Directive 94/9/EC
• Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC
• Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC
The manufacturer declares conformity and the device carries the CE mark.
1.3 Associated documents

This handbook should be read in conjunction with relevant documents in relation to:
• hazardous areas
• communications
• concentration
• corrosion
1.4 Insulation case

On meters fitted with an insulation case, the case will be filled with one of the following
materials:
Cryogenic meters (-200°C...+40°C / -364°F...+104°F)
Block grade EPS 1112A (Polystyrene) containing flame retardant additive (FRA)
Standard meters (-70°C...+230°C / -94°F...+446°F)
Glass mineral wool
Page 105 of 307

1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS OPTIMASS 6000
High temperature meters (-50°C...+400°C / -58°F...+752°F)
Silicon dioxide based mineral wool
Do not open the insulation case. Some, or all, of the above materials can cause:
• skin irritation
• throat and lung irritation
• eye irritation
Install the meter so that water cannot get into the insulation case. Water will damage the
insulation material and reduce performance.
1.5 Pressure Equipment Directive (PED)
LEGAL NOTICE!
The Pressure Equipment Directive places legal requirements on both the manufacturer and the
end user. Please read this section carefully!
To ensure the PED integrity of the meter, you MUST check that the serial numbers on the
converter nameplate and the sensor nameplate are the same.
To comply with the requirements of the Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) the manufacturer
provides all the relevant technical data in the technical data section of this handbook. Secondary
pressure containment is NOT supplied on this meter.
Tube failure
Where the meter is being used to measure high pressure gasses and / or gasses kept as liquids
by high pressure and / or where there is a risk of tube failure because of the use of corrosive or
erosive fluids, frequent pressure and / or thermal cycling, seismic or other shock loading, the
burst disc option MUST be purchased. For more information, please contact your nearest
representative.
DANGER!
If it is suspected that the primary measuring tube has failed, de-pressurise the meter and
remove it from service as soon as it is safe to do so.
Page 106 of 307

1.6 Dirty gas

Dirty gas is gas that carries sand or other solid particles. Dirty gas causes excessive wear to the
primary measuring tube that can eventually result in complete tube failure. In some situations
tube failure where gas is being measured, can be very dangerous.
DANGER!
If the meter is being used to measure gas and there is a risk that the gas might be dirty, you
must fit a filter upstream of the meter to catch solid particles.
1.7 Safety instructions from the manufacturer

1.7.1 Copyright and data protection
The contents of this document have been created with great care. Nevertheless, we provide no
guarantee that the contents are correct, complete or up-to-date.
The contents and works in this document are subject to copyright. Contributions from third
parties are identified as such. Reproduction, processing, dissemination and any type of use
beyond what is permitted under copyright requires written authorisation from the respective
author and/or the manufacturer.
The manufacturer tries always to observe the copyrights of others, and to draw on works created
in-house or works in the public domain.
The collection of personal data (such as names, street addresses or e-mail addresses) in the
manufacturer's documents is always on a voluntary basis whenever possible. Whenever
feasible, it is always possible to make use of the offerings and services without providing any
personal data.
We draw your attention to the fact that data transmission over the Internet (e.g. when
communicating by e-mail) may involve gaps in security. It is not possible to protect such data
completely against access by third parties.
We hereby expressly prohibit the use of the contact data published as part of our duty to publish
an imprint for the purpose of sending us any advertising or informational materials that we have
not expressly requested.
1.7.2 Disclaimer
The manufacturer will not be liable for any damage of any kind by using its product, including,
but not limited to direct, indirect or incidental and consequential damages.
This disclaimer does not apply in case the manufacturer has acted on purpose or with gross
negligence. In the event any applicable law does not allow such limitations on implied warranties
or the exclusion of limitation of certain damages, you may, if such law applies to you, not be
subject to some or all of the above disclaimer, exclusions or limitations.
Any product purchased from the manufacturer is warranted in accordance with the relevant
product documentation and our Terms and Conditions of Sale.
Page 107 of 307

1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS OPTIMASS 6000
The manufacturer reserves the right to alter the content of its documents, including this
disclaimer in any way, at any time, for any reason, without prior notification, and will not be liable
in any way for possible consequences of such changes.
1.7.3 Product liability and warranty

The operator shall bear responsibility for the suitability of the device for the specific purpose.
The manufacturer accepts no liability for the consequences of misuse by the operator. Improper
installation and operation of the devices (systems) will cause the warranty to be void. The
respective "Standard Terms and Conditions" which form the basis for the sales contract shall
also apply.
1.7.4 Information concerning the documentation

To prevent any injury to the user or damage to the device it is essential that you read the
information in this document and observe applicable national standards, safety requirements
and accident prevention regulations.
If this document is not in your native language and if you have any problems understanding the
text, we advise you to contact your local office for assistance. The manufacturer can not accept
responsibility for any damage or injury caused by misunderstanding of the information in this
document.
This document is provided to help you establish operating conditions, which will permit safe and
efficient use of this device. Special considerations and precautions are also described in the
document, which appear in the form of underneath icons.
Page 108 of 307

1.7.5 Warnings and symbols used

Safety warnings are indicated by the following symbols.
DANGER!
This warning refers to the immediate danger when working with electricity.
DANGER!
This warning refers to the immediate danger of burns caused by heat or hot surfaces.
DANGER!
This warning refers to the immediate danger when using this device in a hazardous atmosphere.
DANGER!
These warnings must be observed without fail. Even partial disregard of this warning can lead to
serious health problems and even death. There is also the risk of seriously damaging the device
or parts of the operator's plant.
WARNING!
Disregarding this safety warning, even if only in part, poses the risk of serious health problems.
There is also the risk of damaging the device or parts of the operator's plant.
CAUTION!
Disregarding these instructions can result in damage to the device or to parts of the operator's
plant.
INFORMATION!
These instructions contain important information for the handling of the device.
LEGAL NOTICE!
This note contains information on statutory directives and standards.
• HANDLING
This symbol designates all instructions for actions to be carried out by the operator in the
specified sequence.
i RESULT
This symbol refers to all important consequences of the previous actions.
1.8 Safety instructions for the operator
WARNING!
In general, devices from the manufacturer may only be installed, commissioned, operated and
maintained by properly trained and authorized personnel.
efficient use of this device.
Page 109 of 307

Device description
2 DEVICE DESCRIPTION OPTIMASS 6000
2.1 Scope of delivery

Compact version
1 Mass flowmeter.
2 Carton.
3 Documentation.
4 2.5 mm and 5 mm hex head tools.
5 CD-ROM and calibration certificate.
Remote version
1 Mass flowmeter.
2 Converter. This will be either: field (as shown), wall or rack.
3 Carton.
4 2.5 mm and 5 mm hex head tools.
5 CD-ROM and calibration certificate.
6 Documentation.
If any items are missing, please contact the manufacturer.
If your meter has flange connections, the flange specification is stamped on the outer edge of the
flange. Check that the specification on the flange is the same as your order.
Page 110 of 307

OPTIMASS 6000 DEVICE DESCRIPTION 2
2.1.1 Meters with hygienic connections
1 Fully welded - the O-rings between the meter and the process pipework are not supplied as standard but can be or-
dered.
2 DIN 11864-2 Form A - the O-rings between the Form A and Form B parts of the connection are not supplied as standard
but can be ordered.
3 The 11864-2 Form B is not supplied as part of this connection but it can be ordered.
2.2 Nameplates
INFORMATION!
2.3 Dual Seal

To comply with the requirements of ANSI/ISA -12.27.01-2011 “Requirements for process Sealing
Between electrical systems and Flammable or Combustible process Fluids” a secondary seal is
incorporated into all OPTIMASS / GAS products. If the primary seal fails, the secondary seal will
prevent escaping fluid reaching the electronic compartment.
Pressures and / or temperatures are limited by tube, temperature, connection and Ex limits.
Check the meter nameplates and relevant documentation for full details. On all meters
operating on gas measurement, the casing of the meter is fitted with a burst disc. If the primary
seal (tube) fails leakage will occur from the burst disc. Install the meter so that the burst disc is
pointing away from personnel.
Liquids (Example model code: OPTIMASS 6000F S50 - LIQUID
Pressure and temperature data:
OPTIMASS 6000 / 6000F / 6400C -200°C...+230°C and 100...10000 kPa (Stainless Steel)
OPTIMASS 6000 / 6000F / 6400C -50°C...+230°C and 100...20000 kPa (Hastelloy® / duplex)
OPTIMASS 6000 / 6000F - HT -50°C...+400°C and 100...10000 kPa
If the primary seal fails, the casing of the meter will fill with liquid and the meter will stop
working. The meter will notify the operator by displaying the status message "Sensor: Sensor
signal low" on the converter or PLC display. This is an indication that the primary seal (tube) has
failed and the status of the meter should be checked.
As soon as it is safe to do so, de-pressurise the process line and remove the meter. Please
contact customer service for servicing or replacement of the meter.
Page 111 of 307

2 DEVICE DESCRIPTION OPTIMASS 6000
INFORMATION!
At high pressures, process fluid may also leak from the meter casing. This is also an indicatioin
that the primary seal has failed.
Meter status:
The meter will also display the mesage "Sensor: Sensor signal low" if the measuring tubes are
not completely filled with fluid. For example, if the meter is drained or re/filled.
To check the status of the meter, drain and re/fill with fluid and note the converter or PLC
display. See the relevant section of the converter handbook for a list of status messages and
diagnostics information.
If the meter continues to display the message: "Sensor: Sensor signal low" you MUST assume
that the primary seal (tubes) has failed and the appropriate action MUST be taken.
Gases (Example model code: OPTIMASS 6000F S50 - GAS)
Pressure / temperature data:
OPTIMASS 6000 / 6000F / 6400C -200°C...+230°C and 500... 10000 kPa (Stainless Steel)
OPTIMASS 6000 / 6000F / 6400C -50°C...+230°C and 500...20000 kPa (Hastelloy® / duplex)
OPTIMASS 6000F - HT -50°C...+400°C and 500...10000 kPa
Pressures and/or temperatures may be further limited by tube, temperature, connection and Ex
limits. Consult the meter nameplate and relevant documentation for full details.
On all meters operating on gas measurement the casing of the meter is fitted with a burst disc. If
the primary seal (tube/s) fails leakage will occur from the burst disc. Install the meter so that the
burst disc is pointing away from personnel.
Regular maintenance of the burst disc:
Carry out regular maintenance checks on burst discs for leakage and/or blockages. On all
OPTIMASS meters, the primary seal is considered to be the measuring tube of the meter. The
materials of construction of the measuring tube/s are described within the relevant sections of
this handbook and the customer’s product and any other fluid flowing through the tube must be
compatible with the material of construction. If failure of the primary seal is suspected then the
process line should be de-pressurised and the meter removed as soon as it is safe to do so.
Please contact customer service for servicing or replacement of the meter.
2.4 Temperature differential and thermal shock

Temperature differential
The maximum difference between ambient temperature and process (operating) temperatures
are:
Meter temperature range Maximum temperature differential

-200°C...+40°C / -328°F...+104°F 210°C / 410°F
-70°C...+230°C / -94°F...+446°F
-50°C...+400°C / -58°F...+752°F 380°C / 716°F
Page 112 of 307

OPTIMASS 6000 DEVICE DESCRIPTION 2
Thermal shock
Thermal shock occurs when there is a sudden and extreme change (shift) in process
temperature. To prevent thermal shock on this meter, the manufacturer recommends that you
avoid a temperature shift greater than 100°C / 212°F, at a maximum of 40% of the nominal flow
rate.
These limits will give a minimum calculated life span for the meter of 3500 cycles. Thermal
shocking below this temperature will increase the life span of the meter. For more information,
please contact your nearest representative.
Maximum temperature rate rise
If the change in temperature (rate rise) is greater than 100°C / 212°F, the temperature rise must
be over a period of time. Calculate the time required for the whole temperature rise using the
table below.
Meter size Temp. rate rise Example

DN 08...50 6°C / 10.8°F per minute 20°C...230°C / 68°F...446°F = 35
minutes
20°C...400°C / 68°F...752°F = 80
minutes
DN 80...100 3°C / 5.4°F per minute 20°C...230°C / 68°F...446°F = 70
minutes
20°C...400°C / 68°F...752°F = 140
minutes
These limits will provide a minimum calculated life span for the meter of 2000 cycles.
Temperature rises below 100°C / 212°F, or temperature rises over a longer period of time, will
increase the life span of the meter.
CAUTION!
Operation outside these limits may result in shifts in density and mass flow calibration. Repeated
shocking and / or rapid heating, may also result in premature failure of the meter. However,
higher thermal shocks and / or an increased number of cycles are possible at lower working
pressures. For more information, please contact your nearest representative.
Page 113 of 307

Installation
3.1 General notes on installation

INFORMATION!
Inspect the packaging carefully for damages or signs of rough handling. Report damage to the
carrier and to the local office of the manufacturer.
INFORMATION!
Do a check of the packing list to make sure that you have all the elements given in the order.
INFORMATION!
3.2 Storage
• Store the device in a dry and dust-free location.
• Avoid direct exposure to the sun.
• Store the device in its original packing.
• Do not allow the ambient temperature to fall below -50°C / -58°F or rise above +85°C /
+185°F.
Page 114 of 307

3.3 Handling
1 Use a well maintained sling to lift the meter by the spigots.

2 DO NOT lift the meter by the converter housing or the electronics stem.
3 DO NOT lift the meter by the meter body.
4 DO NOT lift the meter using the flange bolt holes.
Page 115 of 307

3.4 Installation conditions

3.4.1 Supporting the meter
1 Support the weight of the meter on the process pipework.

2 DO NOT leave a long pipe run between the meter and the support. This can cause damage to the meter, especially on
larger meter sizes.
Page 116 of 307

3.4.2 Mounting the meter
Mounting positions
1 The meter can be mounted at an angle but it is recommended that the flow is uphill.
2 Avoid mounting the meter with the flow running downhill because it can cause siphoning. If the meter has to be mount-
ed with the flow running downhill, install an orifice plate or control valve downstream of the meter to maintain back-
pressure.
3 Horizontal mounting with flow running left to right.
4 Avoid mounting meter with long vertical runs after the meter as it can cause cavitation. Where the installation includes
a vertical run after the meter, install an orifice plate or control valve downstream to maintain backpressure.
5 The meter can be mounted vertically but it is recommended that the flow is uphill.
6 Avoid mounting the meter vertically with the flow running downhill. This can cause siphoning. If the meter has to be
installed this way, install an orifice plate or control valve downstream to maintain backpressure.
Page 117 of 307

3.4.3 Gas / liquid build up

In certain applications, the design of the meter can cause either gas or liquid to build up in the
measuring tube.
1 Where liquids are being measured, mount the meter as shown. This will prevent gas building up in the measuring tube,
when there is no flow.
2 Where gases are being measured, mount the meter as shown. This will prevent liquids building up in the measuring
tube, when there is no flow.
3.4.4 Side mounting
The meter can be installed with the converter (or remote junction box) on the side of the meter
so that the measuring tubes are sitting one above the other. Avoid this method of installation
where there is a two phase process flow, or where the process fluid contains gas. If this situation
cannot be avoided, please contact the manufacturer for advice.
Page 118 of 307

3.4.5 Cross talk

Where more than one meter is being installed, a very high level of immunity to cross talk means
that the meters can be mounted within close proximity to each other. The meters can be
mounted either in series or parallel, as shown.
INFORMATION!
Where the meters are installed in series, it is strongly recommended that the process pipe
diameter remains constant. For more information, please contact the manufacturer.
3.4.6 Flange connections
Tighten the flange bolts evenly and in turn.
Page 119 of 307

Use a regular pattern to tighten the bolts evenly
3.4.7 Maximum pipework forces (end loadings)
Mass flowmeters have a maximum level of force (negative or positive) that can be applied to the
ends of the meter. Refer to the table below for permitted forces.
Please refer to the table in the technical data section of this Handbook for the maximum end
loadings.
3.4.8 Pipework reducers
Always avoid extreme step changes in pipe size. Use pipework reducers, where there is a large
difference between pipework size and meter flanges.
Page 120 of 307

3.4.9 Flexible connections
Flexible connections can be used but because of the high flow rates associated with large
diameter meters, it is recommended that flexible connections are not used on meters larger
than size 80.
3.4.10 Hygienic installations
Mounting the meter for hygienic applications
1 Install the meter vertically to allow self draining.

2 DO NOT install the meter horizontally.
Where the meter has been approved by the sanitary requirements of the European Hygienic
Engineering and Design Group, you MUST give consideration to:
• Installation - install the meter at an angle to allow self-draining (see illustration).

• Cleaning fluids - cleaning fluids should flow uphill with a velocity rate greater than
1.5 m/s / 5ft/s. If the process flow is downhill, install a flow restrictor downstream of the
meter. This will make sure that the meter is completely filled with the cleaning fluid.
• Process connections and seals MUST be in accordance with EHEDG documentation.
The manufacturer also recommends that you refer to EHEDG (www.ehedg.org) document
number 8 "HYGIENIC EQUIPMENT DESIGN CRITERIA".
Page 121 of 307

3.4.11 Heating and insulation

Insulation
The meter can be insulated to a maximum depth as shown (A). Do not insulate above this depth
as this will cause the electronics to overheat.
Insulation
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250
Dimension A [mm] 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Dimension A [inches] 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9
Factory fitted heating jacket
If the meter has been ordered with a heating jacket, it will be supplied with DN15 PN40 to EN
1092-1 or 1/2¨ ASME150 flange connections.
Figure 3-1: The loop inside the heating jacket, carries the heating medium.
Connecting / using the heating jacket

• Use rigid or reinforced flexible hoses to connect the heating jacket to the heat source.
• The heating jacket / loop material is SS316.
• Suitable heating mediums are steam or hot oil. Avoid the use of heating mediums that can
cause crevice corrosion in Stainless Steel.
Page 122 of 307

• Where liquid is being used, set up the pipe configuration so that air can be vented from the
system.
• Where steam is being used, set up the pipe configuration so that condensation can be drained
off.
• Gradually heat the jacket to working temperature before flowing the process fluid through
the meter.
CAUTION!
The design of the heating jacket is such that NO end load pressure (negative or positive) can be
applied. The manufacturer recommends that (where possible) flexible hoses are used to connect
to the heat source.
CAUTION!
The maximum heating pressure and temperature for heating jackets is 10 barg at
230°C / 145 psig at 446°F or 5 barg at 400°C / 72.5 psig at 752°F
3.4.12 Purge ports

If the meter has been ordered with a purge port, it will be supplied with NPT female connections
which are clearly marked. The connections are sealed with NPT plugs and PTFE tape.
CAUTION!
DO NOT remove these plugs.
The meter is factory sealed with a dry nitrogen gas fill and if moisture is allowed to enter the
meter casing it will cause damage. The plugs should only be removed to purge the meter casing
in the event that the primary measuring tube fails.
If it is suspected that the primary measuring tube has failed, de-pressurise the meter and
remove it from service, as soon as it is safe to do so.
3.4.13 Burst discs

If the meter has been ordered with a burst disc, it will be supplied with the disc fitted. The failure
pressure of the disc is 10 barg at +20°C / 145 psig at +68°F.
CAUTION!
The fitted burst disc will be suitable for the flow rates and process conditions specified on the
original order. If the process conditions alter in any way, it is recommended that you contact the
manufacturer for advice regarding suitability.
If the process product is hazardous (in any way) it is recommended that an exhaust tube is
connected to the NPT male thread of the burst disc and the pipe routed so that the process
product can be discharged to a safe area. Use a tube with a diameter large enough AND routed in
such a way, so that pressure cannot build up in the meter case.
INFORMATION!
For gas applications, the burst disc must be specified at the time of ordering.
Page 123 of 307

3.4.14 Zero calibration

The procedure for zero calibration is contained in the converter handbook. However, the
following information should be considered when installing the meter.
Zero calibration
1 Where the meter has been installed vertically, install shut-off valves either side of the meter to assist with zero cali-
bration.
2 If the process flow cannot be stopped, install a bypass section for zero calibration.
3.4.15 Sunshades
The meter MUST be protected from strong sunlight.
1 Horizontal installation
2 Vertical installation
Page 124 of 307

OPTIMASS 6000 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 4

DANGER!
DANGER!
DANGER!
documentation.
WARNING!
specialists.
INFORMATION!
4.2 Electrical and I/O connections

For information regarding electrical and I/O connections, please refer to the handbook for the
relevant signal converter.
Page 125 of 307

Service
5 SERVICE OPTIMASS 6000
5.1 Spare parts availability

The manufacturer adheres to the basic principle that functionally adequate spare parts for each
device or each important accessory part will be kept available for a period of 3 years after
delivery of the last production run for the device.
This regulation only applies to spare parts which are subject to wear and tear under normal
operating conditions.
5.2 Availability of services

The manufacturer offers a range of services to support the customer after expiration of the
warranty. These include repair, maintenance, technical support and training.
INFORMATION!
For more precise information, please contact your local sales office.
5.3 Returning the device to the manufacturer

5.3.1 General information
This device has been carefully manufactured and tested. If installed and operated in accordance
with these operating instructions, it will rarely present any problems.
CAUTION!
Should you nevertheless need to return a device for inspection or repair, please pay strict
attention to the following points:
• Due to statutory regulations on environmental protection and safeguarding the health and
safety of our personnel, manufacturer may only handle, test and repair returned devices that
have been in contact with products without risk to personnel and environment.
• This means that the manufacturer can only service this device if it is accompanied by the
following certificate (see next section) confirming that the device is safe to handle.
CAUTION!
If the device has been operated with toxic, caustic, flammable or water-endangering products,
you are kindly requested:
• to check and ensure, if necessary by rinsing or neutralising, that all cavities are free from
such dangerous substances,
• to enclose a certificate with the device confirming that is safe to handle and stating the
product used.
Page 126 of 307

OPTIMASS 6000 SERVICE 5
5.3.2 Form (for copying) to accompany a returned device
Company: Address:
Department: Name:
Tel. no.: Fax no.:
Manufacturer's order no. or serial no.:
The device has been operated with the following medium:
This medium is: radioactive

water-hazardous
toxic
caustic
flammable
We checked that all cavities in the device are free from such
substances.
We have flushed out and neutralized all cavities in the
device.
We hereby confirm that there is no risk to persons or the environment through any residual media
contained in the device when it is returned.
Date: Signature:
Stamp:
5.4 Disposal
CAUTION!
Disposal must be carried out in accordance with legislation applicable in your country.
Page 127 of 307

Technical data
6.1 Measuring principle (twin tube)

Meter from the side, showing tube layout
1 Measuring tubes
2 Drive coil
3 Sensor 1
4 Sensor 2
Static meter not energised and with no flow
1 Measuring tubes
2 Drive coil
3 Sensor 1
4 Sensor 2
A Coriolis twin tube mass flowmeter consists of two measuring tubes 1 a drive coil 2 and two
sensors (3 and 4) that are positioned either side of the drive coil.
Page 128 of 307

Energised meter
1 Measuring tubes
2 Direction of oscilation
3 Sine wave
When the meter is energised, the drive coil vibrates the measuring tubes causing them to
oscillate and produce a sine wave 3. The sine wave is monitored by the two sensors.
Energised meter with process flow
1 Process flow
2 Sine wave
3 Phase shift
When a fluid or gas passes through the tubes, the coriolis effect causes a phase shift in the sine
wave that is detected by the two sensors. This phase shift is directly proportional to the mass
flow.
Density measurement is made by evaluation of the frequency of vibration and temperature

measurement is made using a Pt500 sensor.
Page 129 of 307

6.2 Technical data

INFORMATION!
documentation can be downloaded free of charge from the website (Download Center).
Measuring system
Measuring principle Coriolis mass flow
Application range Mass flow and density measurement of fluids, gases and solids
Measured values Mass, density, temperature
Calculated values Volume, referred density, concentration, velocity
Sensor model range
Stainless Steel 316L 08...250 Compact / remote 100 barg @ 20°C / 1450 psig @ 68°F, temp. range
-70°C...+230°C / -94°F...+446°F
-50°C...+400°C / -58°F...+752°F
-200°C...+40°C / -364°F...+104°F
Hastelloy® 08...80 Compact / remote 200 barg @ 20°C / 2900 psig @ 68°F, temp. range
-70°C...+230°C / -58°F...+446°F
Duplex Stainless Steel 100...200 Compact / remote 200 barg @ 20°C / 2900 psig @ 68°F, temp. range
-50°C...+230°C / -58°F...+446°F
Design
Basic System consists of a measuring sensor and a converter to process the
output signal
Features Fully welded maintenance free sensor with twin V-shaped measuring tube
Variants
Compact version Integral converter
Remote version Available with field or wall versions of the converter
Modbus version Sensor with integral electronics. Modbus output for connection to a PLC
Measuring accuracy
Mass (standard)
Gas ±0.35% of actual measured flow rate + zero stability
Mass (optional)
Repeatability
Liquid Better than 0.05% plus zero stability (includes the combined effects of
Gas Better than 0.2% plus zero stability (includes the combined effects of
Page 130 of 307

Zero stability
08 < 0.03 kg/h
10 < 0.06 kg/h
15 < 0.19 kg/h
25 < 0.95 kg/h
50 < 1.8 kg/h
80 < 3.9 kg/h
100 < 8.8 kg/h
150 < 16 kg/h
200 < 30 kg/h
250 < 50 kg/h
Product Water
Effect on sensor zero point caused by a shift in process temperature
Pressure effect on mass flow rate
Density
Measuring range 100...3000 kg/m3 / 6...187 lbs/ft3
Accuracy ±1 kg/m3 / ±0.06 lbs/ft3
On site calibration ±0.2 kg/m3 / ±0.012 lbs/ft3
Process temperature effect 0.015 g/l per 1°C / 0.0083 g/l per 1°F
Temperature
Accuracy ± 0.5°C / ±0.9°F (± 0.5% of reading)
Nominal flow rates (1 barg / 14.5 psig pressure drop)
08 600 kg/h / 22 lbs/min
10 1200 kg/h / 44 lbs/min
15 3800 kg/h / 139 lbs/min
25 19000 kg/h / 698 lbs/min
50 35000 kg/h / 1286 lbs/min
80 78000 kg/h / 2866 lbs/min
100 175000 kg/h / 6430 lbs/min
150 320000 kg/h / 11758 lbs/min
200 550000 kg/h / 20209 lbs/min
250 1000000 kg/h / 36743 lbs/min
Assumes operating density 1000 kg/m3 / 62.4 lb/ft3
For Hastelloy® meters, assume a pressure drop of 1.15 barg
Page 131 of 307

Maximum flow rates

All meters 150% of nominal flow rate
Ambient temperature
Compact version with Aluminium -40...+65°C / -40…+149°F
converter
Compact version with Stainless Steel -40...+55°C / -40…+131°F
converter
Remote versions Standard temperature range: -40...+65°C / -40…+149°F
Cryogenic temperature range: -20...+65°C / -4…+149°F
Hazardous Area versions Refer to temperature limits
Process temperatures
Standard temperature range (flange connections)
Safe area -70…+230°C / -94…+446°F
High temperature range -50…+400°C / -58…+752°F
Cryogenic temperature range -200…+40°C / -328…+104°F
Standard temperature range (hygienic connections)
Safe area -70…+150°C / -94…+302°F
Nominal pressure at 20°C
20 C / 68°F
68 F
Measuring tube SS 316 / 316L Hastelloy® C22 / S31803
FM / PED 97/23/EC -1…100 barg / -14.5…1450 psig -1…200 barg / -14.5…2900 psig
CRN / ASME B31.3 -1…100 barg / -14.5…1450 psig Pending
Outer casing burst pressure
08 ≈ 100 barg
10
15
25
50 ≈ 70 barg
80
100 ≈ 10 barg
150
200
250
If the process temperature is higher than 20°C / 68°F, the burst pressure will be lower. For more information please
contact the manufacturer.
Fluid properties
Permissible physical condition Liquids, gases, slurries
Permissible gas content (volume) Contact manufacturer for information.
Permissible solid content (volume) Contact manufacturer for information.
Protection category (acc. to EN 60529) IP 67, NEMA 4X
Inlet / outlet runs None required
Page 132 of 307

Materials
Stainless Steel (316 / 316L) meter
Measuring tubes / Flanges Stainless Steel AISI 316 / 316L (1.4401 / 1.4404) dual certified
Spigots Stainless Steel CF3M (1.4409)
316L (1.4401 / 1.4404) dual certified
Stainless Steel (S31803) meter
Measuring tubes / Flanges Stainless Steel UNS 31803 (1.4462)
Spigots Stainless Steel J92205 (1.4470)
316L (1.4401 / 1.4404) dual certified
Hastelloy®
Hastelloy C22 meter
Measuring tubes / raised face Hastelloy® C22
(Backing) flanges Stainless Steel AISI 316 / 316L (1.4401 / 1.4404) dual certified
Bridge Stainless Steel AISI 316 / 316L (1.4401 / 1.4404) dual certified
Outer casing Stainless Steel AISI 316L (1.404) dual certified
Heating jacket version
Heating loop and insulation jacket Stainless Steel AISI 316 (1.4401)
All versions
Junction box (remote version) Die-cast Aluminium (polyurethane coating)
Optional Stainless Steel 316 (1.4401)
Process connections
Flange
DIN (EN 1092-1 2007) DN10…300 / PN16…160
ASME (B616.5) ½...12" / ASME 150…1500
JIS (2220 2001) 10A...300A / 10...20K (10K maximum allowable temperature 300°C / 572°F)
Hygienic (08...50 only)
Tri-clover ¾...3"
Tri-clamp DIN 32676 DN15..80
Tri-clamp ISO 2852 1...3"
DIN 11864-2 Form A (female) DN15...80
Male thread DIN 11851 (threaded DN15...80
sanitary connection)
Male thread SMS 25...76 mm / 1...3"
Electrical connections For full details, including: power supply, power consumption etc., see
I/O For full details of I/O options, including data streams and protocols, see
Page 133 of 307

Approvals
Mechanical
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Namur NE 21/5.95
acc. to CE
2004/108/EC (EMC)
2006/95/EC (Low Voltage Directive)
European Pressure Equipment Directive PED 97-23 EC (acc. to EN13445-3)
CRN acc. to ASME B31.3 (pending)
NACE MR0175 / ISO 15156 ("Sulphide Stress Corrosion Cracking Resistant Metalic
Materials for OIl Field Equipment") and MR0103 ("Materials Resistant to
Sulfide Stress Cracking in Corrosive Petroleum Refining Environments")
ATEX (acc. 94/9/EC)
OPTIMASS 6400C non Ex i signal outputs
Ex d connection compartment II 1/2 G Ex d ia IIC T6....T1 Ga/Gb
Ex e connection compartment II 1/2 G Ex de ia IIC T6....T1 Ga/Gb
OPTIMASS 6400C Ex i signal outputs
Ex d connection compartment II 1/2(1) G Ex d ia [ia Ga] IIC T6....T1 Ga/Gb
Ex e connection compartment II 1/2(1) G Ex de ia [ia Ga] IIC T6....T1 Ga/Gb
OPTIMASS 6000 / 6000F II 1 G Ex ia IIC T6...T1 Ga
ATEX (acc. 94/9/EC) temperature limits

OPTIMASS 6000 / 6000F with or without heating jacket / insulation.
Ambient temp. Tamb °C Medium temp. Tm °C Temp. class Max. Surface temp. °C
-40...40 -50...40 T6 T80
-50...150 T3 T190
-50...230 T2-T1 T270
-40...55 -50...40 T6 T80
-50...150 T3 T190
-50...230 T2-T1 T270
-40...65 -50...40 T6 T80
-50...150 T3 T190
-50...230 T2-T1 T270
Cryogenic version
-20...65 -200...40 T6-T1 T80
OPTIMASS 6400C with aluminium converter housing, with or without heating jacket / insulation
-40...40 -50...40 T6 T80
-50...150 T3 T190
-50...230 T2-T1 T270
Page 134 of 307

-40...50 -50...40 T6 T80

-50...150 T3 T190
-50...230 T2-T1 T270
-40...65 -50...65 T4-T1 T105
Cryogenic version
-40...65 -200...40 T6-T1 T80
OPTIMASS 6400C with SS converter housing, with or without heating jacket / insulation.
-40...40 -50...40 T6 T80
-50...150 T3 T190
-50...230 T2-T1 T270
-40...50 -50...40 T6 T80
-50...150 T3 T190
-50...230 T2-T1 T270
-40...60 -50...60 T4-T1 T100
Cryogenic version
-25...+60 -200...40 T6-T1 T80
High temperature versions
OPTIMASS 6000F - HT with aluminium junction box, heating jacket and insulation
-40...40 -50...40 T6 T80
-50...230 T2 T270
-50...400 T1 T440
-40...55 -50...40 T6 T80
-50...230 T2 T270
-50...400 T1 T440
-40...60 -50...40 T6 T80
-50...230 T2 T270
-50...400 T1 T440
-40...65 -50...350 T1 T390
OPTIMASS 6000F - HT with SS junction box, heating jacket and insulation
-40...40 -50...40 T6 T80
-50...230 T2 T270
-50...400 T1 T440
-40...50 -50...40 T6 T80
-50...230 T2 T270
-50...400 T1 T440
-40...55 -50...40 T6 T80
-50...230 T2 T270
-50...400 T1 T440
-40...60 -50...350 T1 T390
OPTIMASS 6000F - HT with aluminium or SS junction box, insulation but no heating jacket
-40...40 -50...40 T6 T80
-50...230 T2 T270
-50...400 T1 T440
Page 135 of 307

-40...55 -50...40 T6 T80

-50...230 T2 T270
-50...400 T1 T440
-40...65 -50...40 T6 T80
-50...230 T2 T270
-50...400 T1 T440
Maximum end loadings (Stainless Steel 316 / 316L)

S08 / S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250
S10
Flanges
100 barg 12 kN 17 kN 19 kN 15 kN 20 kN 100 kN 150 kN 150 kN 200 kN
60 barg 5 kN 20 kN
400°C 27.4 5 kN 6 kN 10 kN 12 kN 20 kN 50 kN 80 kN 100 kN 150 kN
barg
40 barg 4 kN 5 kN 20 kN
Hygienic (all connections)
150°C 10 barg 5 kN 9 kN 12 kN 12 kN 18 kN N/A N/A N/A N/A
Maximum end loadings (Hastelloy® and Stainless Steel UNS S31803)

H08 / H10 H15 H25 H50 H80 D100 D150 D200
Flanges (not including CRN)
20°C 200 barg 12 kN 17 kN 19 kN 15 kN 20 kN 100 kN 150 kN
230°C 145 barg 5 kN 20 kN
Flanges (CRN regions)
20°C 200 barg 12 kN 17 kN 19 kN 15 kN 20 kN 60 kN 30 kN 10 kN
1
230°C 145 barg 5 kN 20 kN
2
1 D200 limited to 180 barg at 20°C
2 D100 and D150 limited to 120 barg at 230°C. D200 limited to 110 barg at 230°C
• The loads shown are the maximum permitted static load. If loads are cycling (between
tension and compression) these loads should be reduced. For advice, consult the
manufacturer.
Page 136 of 307

6.3 Measuring accuracy
X nominal flow rate [%]

Y measuring error [%]
Measuring error
The measuring error is obtained from the combined effects of accuracy and zero stability.
Product Water
6.4 Guidelines for maximum operating pressure

Notes:
• Ensure that the meter is used within its operating limits
• All hygienic process connections have a maximum operating rating of 10 barg
at 150°C / 145 psig at 302°F
Page 137 of 307

Pressure / temperature de-rating (metric) for meters with SS 316 measuring tubes.
X temperature [°C]
Y pressure [barg]
1 Measuring tube PED certification

Pressure / temperature de-rating (imperial) for meters with SS 316 measuring tubes.
X temperature [°F]
Y pressure [psig]
1 Measuring Tube PED certification

Page 138 of 307

X temperature [°C]
Y pressure [barg]
Pressure / temperature de-rating (imperial) for meters with SS 316, PED certified
X temperature [°F]
Y pressure [psig]
Page 139 of 307

Pressure / temperature de-rating (metric) for meters with SS 31803 and Hastelloy®
Hastelloy
C22, PED certified measuring tubes. Standard temperature range
X temperature [°C]
Y pressure [barg]
1 PED / CRN H08...80

2 CRN D100...150
3 CRN D200
Hastelloy®
Pressure / temperature de-rating (imperial) for meters with SS 31803 and Hastelloy
C22, PED certified measuring tubes. Standard temperature range.
X temperature [°F]
Y pressure [psig]
1 PED / CRN H08...80

2 CRN D100...150
3 CRN D200
Page 140 of 307

measuring tubes. Cryogenic temperature range.
X temperature [°C]
Y pressure [barg]
Pressure / temperature de-rating (imperial) for meters with SS 316 measuring tubes
PED certified. Cryogenic temperature range.
X temperature [°F]
Y pressure [psig]
Flanges
• DIN flange ratings are based on EN 1092-1 2007 table G.4.1 material group 14EO
• ASME flange ratings are based on ASME B16.5 2003 table 2 material group 2.2
• JIS flange ratings are based on JIS 2220: 2001 table 1 division 1 material group 022a
• JIS 10K flanges are limited to a maximum temperature of 300°C / 572°F
Page 141 of 307

Notes
• The maximum operating pressure will be either the flange rating or the measuring tube
rating, WHICHEVER IS THE LOWER!
• The manufacturer recommends that the seals are replaced at regular intervals. This will
maintain the hygienic integrity of the connection.

6.5.1 Flanged versions
Meter weights
kg
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250
Aluminium 9.3 10.1 12.9 23.5 29.4 58.9 94.3 193.6 443.6 911.2
(compact)
Stainless Steel 15.2 16 18.8 29.4 35.3 64.8 100.2 199.5 449.5 917.1
(compact)
Aluminium 5.8 6.6 9.4 19.9 25.9 55.4 90.8 190.1 440 907.6
(remote)
Stainless Steel 6.6 7.3 10.2 20.7 26.6 56.1 91.5 191.5 440.8 908.4
(remote)
Heating jacket add 3.1 4.5 7 7.9 12.7 15.7 27.6 N/A
lbs
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250
Aluminium 20.5 22.3 28.4 51.8 64.8 129.8 207.9 426.8 978 2008.8
(compact)
Stainless Steel 33.5 35.3 41.4 64.8 77.8 142.9 220.9 440.7 991 2021.9
(compact)
Aluminium 12.8 14.5 20.7 43.9 57.1 122.1 200.2 419.1 970 2001
(remote)
Stainless Steel 14.55 16.1 22.5 45.6 58.6 123.7 201.7 422.2 971.8 2002.7
(remote)
Heating jacket add 6.8 9.9 15.4 17.4 28 34.6 60.8 N/A
The weights shown are for meters fitted with PN40 flanges. Smaller or larger flange sizes will
affect the overall weight. For further information, please contact the manufacturer.
Page 142 of 307

Meter dimensions
1 Compact version
2 Remote version
General dimensions
mm
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250
A ±3 156 186 282 326 411 547 555 675 805
C 123.5
D 137
E1 ±3 (compact) 375 376 393 428 455 480 522 598
E2 ±3 (remote 250°C) 295 296 316 348 375 400 442 518
E2 ±3 (remote 400°C) 335 336 353 388 415 440 482 558
F ±2 81 118 130 188 243 275 355 508
inches
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250
A ±0.11 6.14 7.3 11.1 12.8 16.2 21.5 21.8 26.6 31.7
C 4.9
D 5.4
E1 ±0.12 (compact) 14.8 14.8 15.5 16.8 17.9 18.9 20.5 23.5
E2 ±0.12 (remote 482°F) 11.6 11.6 12.4 13.7 14.8 15.7 17.4 20.4
E2 ±0.12 (remote 752°F) 13.2 13.2 13.9 15.3 16.3 17.3 19 22
F ±0.08 3.2 4.6 5.1 7.4 9.6 10.8 14 20
Page 143 of 307


mm (±5)
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250
PN16
DN80 - - - - - - 970 - - -
DN100 - - - - - - 1000 1154 - -
DN150 - - - - - - - 1200 1572 -
DN200 - - - - - - - - 1586 -
DN250 - - - - - - - - - 2100
DN300 - - - - - - - - - 2026
PN40
DN10 335 347 - - - - - - - -
DN15 341 353 510 - - - - - - -
DN25 - - 514 600 - - - - - -
DN40 - - - 610 709 - - - - -
DN50 - - - - 715 895 - - - -
DN80 - - - - - 915 986 - - -
DN100 - - - - - - 1000 1180 - -
DN150 - - - - - - - 1200 1612 -
DN200 - - - - - - - - 1638 -
DN250 - - - - - - - - - 2080
DN300 - - - - - - - - - 2100
PN63
DN50 - - - - 743 923 - - - -
DN80 - - - - - 943 1014 - - -
DN100 - - - - - - 1026 1206 - -
DN150 - - - - - - - 1240 1652 -
DN200 - - - - - - - - 1682 -
DN250 - - - - - - - - - 2120
DN300 - - - - - - - - - 2150
PN100
DN10 355 367 - - - - - - - -
DN15 355 367 524 - - - - - - -
DN25 - - 550 636 - - - - - -
DN40 - - - 644 743 - - - - -
DN50 - - - - 755 935 - - - -
DN80 - - - - - 955 1026 - - -
DN100 - - - - - - 1050 1230 - -
DN150 - - - - - - - 1280 1692 -
DN200 - - - - - - - - 1722 -
DN250 - - - - - - - - - 2184
DN300 - - - - - - - - - 2210
Page 144 of 307

mm (±5)
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250
ASME 150
½¨ 361 373 530 - - - - - - -
¾¨ - - 540 - - - - - - -
1¨ - - 546 632 - - - - - -
1½¨ - - - 644 743 - - - - -
2¨ - - - - 747 926 - - - -
3¨ - - - - - 939 1010 - - -
4¨ - - - - - - 1022 1202 - -
6¨ - - - - - - - 1228 1640 -
8¨ - - - - - - - - 1666 -
10¨ - - - - - - - - - 2074
12¨ - - - - - - - - - 2100
ASME 300
½¨ 371 383 540 - - - - - - -
¾¨ - - 550 - - - - - - -
1¨ - - 558 644 - - - - - -
1½¨ - - - 658 757 - - - - -
2¨ - - - - 759 939 - - - -
3¨ - - - - - 957 1028 - - -
4¨ - - - - - - 1042 1222 - -
6¨ - - - - - - - 1246 1658 -
8¨ - - - - - - - - 1686 -
10¨ - - - - - - - - - 2106
12¨ - - - - - - - - - 2132
ASME 600
½¨ 383 395 552 - - - - - - -
¾¨ - - 562 - - - - - - -
1¨ - - 572 658 - - - - - -
1½¨ - - - 674 773 - - - - -
2¨ - - - - 779 959 - - - -
3¨ - - - - - 977 1048 - - -
4¨ - - - - - - 1086 1266 - -
6¨ - - - - - - - 1298 1710 -
8¨ - - - - - - - - 1742 -
10¨ - - - - - - - - - 2186
12¨ - - - - - - - - - 2194
JIS 10K
50A - - - - 715 895 - - - -
80A - - - - - 915 986 - - -
100A - - - - - - 1022 1202 - -
150A - - - - - - - 1202 1652 -
Page 145 of 307

mm (±5)
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250
200A - - - - - - - - 1666 -
250A - - - - - - - - - 2106
300A - - - - - - - - - 2124
JIS 20K
10A 341 353 - - - - - - - -
15A 341 353 510 - - - - - - -
25A - - 514 600 - - - - - -
40A - - - 610 709 - - - - -
50A - - - - 715 895 - - - -
80A - - - - - 915 986 - - -
100A - - - - - - 1022 1240 - -
150A - - - - - - - 1240 1652 -
200A - - - - - - - - 1666 -
250A - - - - - - - - - 2106
300A - - - - - - - - - 2124
inches (±0.2)
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250
PN16
DN80 - - - - - - 38.2 - - -
DN100 - - - - - - 39.3 45.4 - -
DN150 - - - - - - - 47.2 61.9 -
DN200 - - - - - - - - 62.4 -
DN250 - - - - - - - - - 82.7
DN300 - - - - - - - - - 79.8
PN40
DN10 13.2 13.7 - - - - - - - -
DN15 13.4 13.9 20.1 - - - - - - -
DN25 - - 20.2 23.6 - - - - - -
DN40 - - - 24 27.9 - - - - -
DN50 - - - - 28.1 35.2 - - - -
DN80 - - - - - 36 38.8 - - -
DN100 - - - - - - 39.4 46.4 - -
DN150 - - - - - - - 47.2 63.5 -
DN200 - - - - - - - - 64.5 -
DN250 - - - - - - - - - 81.9
DN300 - - - - - - - - - 82.7
PN63
DN50 - - - - 29.2 36.3 - - - -
DN80 - - - - - 37.1 39.9 - - -
Page 146 of 307

inches (±0.2)
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250
DN100 - - - - - - 40.4 47.5 - -
DN150 - - - - - - - 48.8 65 -
DN200 - - - - - - - - 66.2 -
DN250 - - - - - - - - - 83.5
DN300 - - - - - - - - - 84.6
PN100
DN10 14 14.4 - - - - - - - -
DN15 14 14.4 20.6 - - - - - - -
DN25 - - 21.6 25 - - - - - -
DN40 - - - 25.3 29.2 - - - - -
DN50 - - - - 29.7 36.8 - - - -
DN80 - - - - - 37.6 40.4 - - -
DN100 - - - - - - 41.3 48.4 - -
DN150 - - - - - - - 50.4 66.6 -
DN200 - - - - - - - - 67.8 -
DN250 - - - - - - - - - 85.9
DN300 - - - - - - - - - 87
ASME 150
½¨ 14.2 14.7 20.9 - - - - - - -
¾¨ - - 21.2 - - - - - - -
1¨ - - 21.5 24.9 - - - - - -
1½¨ - - - 25.3 29.2 - - - - -
2¨ - - - - 29.4 36.5 - - - -
3¨ - - - - - 37 39.8 - - -
4¨ - - - - - - 40.2 47.3 - -
6¨ - - - - - - - 48.3 64.6 -
8¨ - - - - - - - - 65.6 -
10¨ - - - - - - - - - 81.6
12¨ - - - - - - - - - 82.7
ASME 300
½¨ 14.6 15.1 21.2 - - - - - - -
¾¨ - - 21.6 - - - - - - -
1¨ - - 22 25.3 - - - - - -
1½¨ - - - 25.9 29.8 - - - - -
2¨ - - - - 30 37 - - - -
3¨ - - - - - 37.7 40.5 - - -
4¨ - - - - - - 41 48.1 - -
6¨ - - - - - - - 49 65.3 -
8¨ - - - - - - - - 66.4 -
10¨ - - - - - - - - - 82.9
12¨ - - - - - - - - - 83.9
Page 147 of 307

inches (±0.2)
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250
ASME 600
½¨ 15.1 15.5 21.7 - - - - - - -
¾¨ - - 22.1 - - - - - - -
1¨ - - 22.5 25.9 - - - - - -
1½¨ - - - 26.5 30.4 - - - - -
2¨ - - - - 30.7 37.7 - - - -
3¨ - - - - - 38.5 41.2 - - -
4¨ - - - - - - 42.8 49.8 - -
6¨ - - - - - - - 51.1 67.3 -
8¨ - - - - - - - - 68.6 -
10¨ - - - - - - - - - 86
12¨ - - - - - - - - - 86.4
JIS 10K
50A - - - - 28.2 35.2 - - - -
80A - - - - - 36 38.8 - - -
100A - - - - - - 40.2 47.3 - -
150A - - - - - - - 47.3 65 -
200A - - - - - - - - 65.5 -
250A - - - - - - - - - 82.9
300A - - - - - - - - - 83.6
JIS 20K
10A 13.4 13.9 - - - - - - - -
15A 13.4 13.9 20 - - - - - - -
25A - - 20.2 23.6 - - - - - -
40A - - - 24 27.9 - - - - -
50A - - - - 28.2 35.2 - - - -
80A - - - - - 36 38.8 - - -
100A - - - - - - 40.2 48.8 - -
150A - - - - - - - 48.8 65 -
200A - - - - - - - - 62.6 -
250A - - - - - - - - - 82.9
300A - - - - - - - - - 83.6
Dimension B for meters with Hastelloy® and Stainless Steel (UNS S31803) measuring tubes
mm
H08 H10 H15 H25 H50 H80 D100 D150 D200

PN40
DN15 328 353 - - - - - - -
DN25 - - 510 - - - - - -
DN40 - - - 600 - - - - -
DN50 - - - - 715 - - - -
Page 148 of 307

mm
H08 H10 H15 H25 H50 H80 D100 D150 D200

DN80 - - - - - 915 - - -
PN63
DN50 - - - - 715 - - - -
DN80 - - - - - 915 - - -
PN100
DN15 328 353 - - - - - - -
DN25 - - 510 - - - - - -
DN40 - - - 600 - - - - -
DN50 - - - - 715 - - - -
DN80 - - - - - 915 - - -
PN160
DN15 328 353 - - - - - - -
DN25 - - 510 - - - - - -
DN40 - - - 600 - - - - -
DN50 - - - - 715 - - - -
DN80 - - - - - 915 1042 - -
DN100 - - - - - - 1070 1250 -
DN150 - - - - - - - 1306 1718
DN200 - - - - - - - - 1742
ASME 150
½¨ 328 353 - - - - - - -
1¨ - - 510 - - - - - -
1½¨ - - - 600 - - - - -
2¨ - - - - 715 - - - -
3¨ - - - - - 915 - - -
ASME 300
½¨ 328 353 - - - - - - -
1¨ - - 510 - - - - - -
1½¨ - - - 600 - - - - -
2¨ - - - - 715 - - - -
3¨ - - - - - 915 - - -
ASME 600
½¨ 328 353 - - - - - - -
1¨ - - 510 - - - - - -
1½¨ - - - 600 - - - - -
2¨ - - - - 715 - - - -
3¨ - - - - - 915 - - -
ASME 900
1½¨ - - - 600 - - - - -
2¨ - - - - 715 - - - -
3¨ - - - - - 915 1086 - -
Page 149 of 307

mm
H08 H10 H15 H25 H50 H80 D100 D150 D200

4¨ - - - - - - 1112 1292 -
6¨ - - - - - - - 1342 1754
8¨ - - - - - - - - 1798
ASME 1500
½¨ 328 353 - - - - - - -
1¨ - - 510 - - - - - -
1½¨ - - - 600 - - - - -
2¨ - - - - 715 - - - -
3¨ - - - - - 915 1118 - -
4¨ - - - - - - 1130 1310 -
6¨ - - - - - - - 1406 1818
8¨ - - - - - - - - 1900
JIS 10K
50A - - - - 715 - - - -
80A - - - - - 915 - - -
JIS 20K
15A 328 353 - - - - - - -
25A - - 510 - - - - - -
40A - - - 600 - - - - -
50A - - - - 715 - - - -
80A - - - - - 915 - - -
inches
H08 H10 H15 H25 H50 H80 D100 D150 D200

PN40
DN15 12.9 13.9 - - - - - - -
DN25 - - 20.1 - - - - - -
DN40 - - - 23.6 - - - - -
DN50 - - - - 28.1 - - - -
DN80 - - - - - 36 - - -
PN63
DN50 - - - - 28.1 - - - -
DN80 - - - - - 36 - - -
PN100
DN15 12.9 13.9 - - - - - - -
DN25 - - 20.1 - - - - - -
DN40 - - - 23.6 - - - - -
DN50 - - - - 28.1 - - - -
DN80 - - - - - 36 - - -
Page 150 of 307

inches
H08 H10 H15 H25 H50 H80 D100 D150 D200

PN160
DN15 12.9 13.9 - - - - - - -
DN25 - - 20.1 - - - - - -
DN40 - - - 23.6 - - - - -
DN50 - - - - 28.1 - - - -
DN80 - - - - - 36 41 - -
DN100 - - - - - - 42.1 49.2 -
DN150 - - - - - - - 51.4 67.6
DN200 - - - - - - - - 68.6
ASME 150
½¨ 12.9 13.9 - - - - - - -
1¨ - - 20.1 - - - - - -
1½¨ - - - 23.6 - - - - -
2¨ - - - - 28.1 - - - -
3¨ - - - - - 36 - - -
ASME 300
½¨ 12.9 13.9 - - - - - - -
1¨ - - 20.1 - - - - - -
1½¨ - - - 23.6 - - - - -
2¨ - - - - 28.1 - - - -
3¨ - - - - - 36 - - -
ASME 600
½¨ 12.9 13.9 - - - - - - -
1¨ - - 20.1 - - - - - -
1½¨ - - - 23.6 - - - - -
2¨ - - - - 28.1 - - - -
3¨ - - - - - 36 - - -
ASME 900
1½¨ - - - 23.6 - - - - -
2¨ - - - - 28.1 - - - -
3¨ - - - - - 36 42.7 - -
4¨ - - - - - - 43.7 50.9 -
6¨ - - - - - - - 52.7 69
8¨ - - - - - - - - 70.8
ASME 1500
½¨ 12.9 13.9 - - - - - - -
1¨ - - 20.1 - - - - - -
1½¨ - - - 23.6 - - - - -
2¨ - - - - 28.1 - - - -
3¨ - - - - - 36 44 - -
4¨ - - - - - - 44.5 51.6 -
Page 151 of 307

inches
H08 H10 H15 H25 H50 H80 D100 D150 D200

6¨ - - - - - - - 55.3 71.6
8¨ - - - - - - - - 74.8
JIS 10K
50A - - - - 28.1 - - - -
80A - - - - - 36 - - -
JIS 20K
15A 12.9 13.9 - - - - - - -
25A - - 20.1 - - - - - -
40A - - - 23.6 - - - - -
50A - - - - 28.1 - - - -
80A - - - - - 36 - - -
Page 152 of 307

6.5.2 NAMUR dimensions

The following face to face dimensions comply with NAMUR NE132
mm (±3)
S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S250

PN10
DN250 - - - - - - 2100
PN16
DN100 - - - - 1000 - -
DN150 - - - - - 1200 -
DN200 - - - - - - 2100
PN40
DN 15 510 - - - - - -
DN 25 - 600 - - - - -
DN 50 - - 715 - - - -
DN 80 - - - 915 - - -
inches (±0.12)
S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S250

PN10
DN250 - - - - - - 82.7
PN16
DN100 - - - - 39.4 - -
DN150 - - - - - 47.2 -
DN200 - - - - - - 82.7
PN40
DN 15 20.1 - - - - - -
DN 25 - 23.6 - - - - -
DN 50 - - 28.1 - - - -
DN 80 - - - 36 - - -
Page 153 of 307

6.5.3 Hygienic versions

mm (±5)
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80

Tri-clover
½¨ 308 320 - - - -
1¨ - - 477 - - -
1½¨ - - - 563 - -
2¨ - - - - 662 -
3¨ - - - - - 842
Tri-clamp DIN 32676
DN15 301 313 - - - -
DN25 - - 477 - - -
DN40 - - - 563 - -
DN50 - - - - 662 -
DN80 - - - - - 855
Tri-clamp ISO 2852
1¨ - - 483 - - -
1½¨ - - - 569 - -
2¨ - - - - 668 -
3¨ - - - - - 848
DN15 345 357 - - - -
DN25 - - 514 - - -
DN40 - - - 610 - -
DN50 - - - - 709 -
DN80 - - - - - 915
Page 154 of 307

mm (±5)
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80

DN15 307 319 - - - -
DN25 - - 492 - - -
DN40 - - - 586 - -
DN50 - - - - 689 -
DN80 - - - - - 889
Male thread SMS
1¨ - - 464 - - -
1½¨ - - - 566 - -
2¨ - - - - 665 -
3¨ - - - - - 847
inches (±0.2)
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80

Tri-clover
½¨ 12.1 12.6 - - - -
1¨ - - 18.8 - - -
1½¨ - - - 22.2 - -
2¨ - - - - 26 -
3¨ - - - - - 33.1
Tri-clamp DIN 32676
DN15 11.8 12.3 - - - -
DN25 - - 18.8 - - -
DN40 - - - 22.2 - -
DN50 - - - - 26 -
DN80 - - - - - 33.7
Tri-clamp ISO 2852
1¨ - - 19 - - -
1½¨ - - - 22.4 - -
2¨ - - - - 26.3 -
3¨ - - - - - 33.4
DN15 13.6 14 - - - -
DN25 - - 20.2 - - -
DN40 - - - 24 - -
DN50 - - - - 27.9 -
DN80 - - - - - 36
Page 155 of 307

inches (±0.2)
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80

DN15 12 12.5 - - - -
DN25 - - 19.4 - - -
DN40 - - - 23 - -
DN50 - - - - 27.1 -
DN80 - - - - - 35
Male thread SMS
1¨ - - 18.3 - - -
1½¨ - - - 22.3 - -
2¨ - - - - 26.2 -
3¨ - - - - - 33.3
Page 156 of 307

6.5.4 Heating jacket version
General dimensions
mm
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250

A ±5.0 435 590 692 715 891 956 1139 TBA TBA
B ±3.0 283 440 542 565 741 806 989 TBA TBA
C ±3.0 100 130 210 230 320 340 450 TBA TBA
D ±3.0 315 344 453 499 622 682 844 TBA TBA
E ±3.0 198 221 316 356 451 486 617 TBA TBA
F ±3.0 232 226 254 266 322 372 428 TBA TBA
inches
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250

A ±0.2 17.1 23.2 27.2 28.1 35.1 37.6 44.8 TBA TBA
B ±0.12 11.1 17.3 21.3 22.2 29.2 31.7 38.9 TBA TBA
C ±0.12 3.9 5.1 8.3 9 12.6 13.4 17.7 TBA TBA
D ±0.12 12.4 13.5 17.8 19.6 24.5 26.8 33.2 TBA TBA
E ±0.12 7.8 8.7 12.4 14 17.7 19.1 24.3 TBA TBA
F ±0.12 9.1 8.9 10 10.5 12.7 14.6 16.8 TBA TBA
Page 157 of 307

6.5.5 Purge port option
Dimensions
mm
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250
A 70 110 145 150 205 220 345 600 800
B 32 45 57 60 85 100 160 140
inches
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250
A 2.7 4.3 5.7 5.9 8.1 8.7 13.6 23.6 31.5
B 1.3 1.8 2.2 2.4 3.3 3.9 6.3 5.5
6.5.6 Burst discs

If the meter has been ordered with a burst disc, it will be supplied with the disc fitted. The failure
pressure of the disc is 10 barg at +20°C / 145 psig at +68°F.
CAUTION!
The fitted burst disc will be suitable for the flow rates and process conditions specified on the
original order. If the process conditions alter in any way, it is recommended that you contact the
manufacturer for advice regarding suitability.
If the process product is hazardous (in any way) it is recommended that an exhaust tube is
connected to the NPT male thread of the burst disc and the pipe routed so that the process
product can be discharged to a safe area. Use a tube with a diameter large enough AND routed in
such a way, so that pressure cannot build up in the meter case.
INFORMATION!
For gas applications, the burst disc must be specified at the time of ordering.
Page 158 of 307

6.5.7 Burst disc option
Dimensions
mm
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250
A 76 92 135 57 74 175 160 220
B 38.5 62 0 0 0 0 0 60
inches
S08 S10 S15 S25 S50 S80 S100 S150 S200 S250
A 3.0 3.6 5.3 2.2 2.9 6.9 6.3 8.7
B 1.52 2.4 0 0 0 0 0 2.4
Page 159 of 307

KROHNE product overview

• Electromagnetic flowmeters
• Variable area flowmeters
• Ultrasonic flowmeters
© KROHNE 07/2014 - 4001894003 - MA OPTIMASS 6000 R03 en - Subject to change without notice.
• Mass flowmeters
• Vortex flowmeters
• Flow controllers
• Level meters
• Temperature assemblies
• Pressure transmitters
• Analysis products
• Products and systems for the oil & gas industry
• Measuring systems for the marine industry

Tel.:+49 203 301 0
Fax:+49 203 301 103 89
info@krohne.com
www.krohne.com
Page 160 of 307

MFC 400 Handbook
Signal converter for mass flowmeters
Electronic Revision:
ER 1.0.xx
documentation for the flow sensor.
© KROHNE 08/2015 - 4002075803 - MA MFC 400 R03 en
Page 161 of 307

: IMPRINT :::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::
All rights reserved. It is prohibited to reproduce this documentation, or any part thereof, without
the prior written authorisation of KROHNE Messtechnik GmbH.
Subject to change without notice.
Copyright 2015 by
KROHNE Messtechnik GmbH - Ludwig-Krohne-Str. 5 - 47058 Duisburg (Germany)
2 www.krohne.com 08/2015 - 4002075803 - MA MFC 400 R03 en
Page 162 of 307

MFC 400 CONTENTS
1 Safety instructions 6
1.1 Software history ............................................................................................................... 6

1.2 Intended use ..................................................................................................................... 7
1.3 Certifications .................................................................................................................... 7
1.4 Safety instructions from the manufacturer ..................................................................... 8
1.4.1 Copyright and data protection ................................................................................................ 8
1.4.2 Disclaimer ............................................................................................................................... 8
1.4.3 Product liability and warranty ................................................................................................ 9
1.4.4 Information concerning the documentation........................................................................... 9
1.4.5 Warnings and symbols used................................................................................................. 10
1.5 Safety instructions for the operator............................................................................... 10
2 Device description 11
2.1 Scope of delivery............................................................................................................. 11

2.2 Device description .......................................................................................................... 12
2.2.1 Field housing......................................................................................................................... 13
2.3 Nameplates .................................................................................................................... 14
2.3.1 Example of a nameplate ....................................................................................................... 14
2.3.2 Electrical connection data of inputs/outputs (example of basic version)............................ 15
3 Installation 16
3.1 General notes on installation ......................................................................................... 16

3.2 Storage ........................................................................................................................... 16
3.3 Transport ........................................................................................................................ 16
3.4 Installation specifications .............................................................................................. 16
3.5 Mounting of the compact version................................................................................... 17
3.6 Mounting the field housing, remote version .................................................................. 17
3.6.1 Pipe mounting ....................................................................................................................... 17
3.6.2 Wall mounting ....................................................................................................................... 18
3.6.3 Turning the display of the field housing version .................................................................. 19

4.2 Important notes on electrical connection...................................................................... 20
4.3 Signal cable requirements ............................................................................................. 21
4.4 Connecting the signal cables ......................................................................................... 22
4.4.1 Connection of signal cable - Field housing and connection box for sensor ........................ 23
4.4.2 Connection diagram.............................................................................................................. 24
4.5 Grounding the flow sensor ............................................................................................. 25
4.6 Connecting power – all housing variants....................................................................... 26
4.7 Inputs and outputs, overview ......................................................................................... 27
4.7.1 Combinations of the inputs/outputs (I/Os) ........................................................................... 27
4.7.2 Description of the CG number .............................................................................................. 28
4.7.3 Fixed, non-alterable input/output versions.......................................................................... 29
4.7.4 Alterable input/output versions............................................................................................ 31
4.8 Description of the inputs and outputs............................................................................ 32
08/2015 - 4002075803 - MA MFC 400 R03 en www.krohne.com 3
Page 163 of 307

CONTENTS MFC 400
4.8.1 Current output ...................................................................................................................... 32

4.8.2 Pulse output and frequency output ...................................................................................... 33
4.8.3 Status output and limit switch .............................................................................................. 34
4.8.4 Control input ......................................................................................................................... 35
4.9 Electrical connection of the inputs and outputs ............................................................ 36
4.9.1 Field housing, electrical connection of the inputs and outputs ........................................... 36
4.9.2 Laying electrical cables correctly......................................................................................... 37
4.10 Description of the inputs and outputs .......................................................................... 38
4.10.1 Important notes................................................................................................................... 38
4.10.2 Description of the electrical symbols ................................................................................. 39
4.10.3 Basic inputs/outputs ........................................................................................................... 40
4.10.4 Modular inputs/outputs and bus systems .......................................................................... 43
4.10.5 Ex i inputs/outputs .............................................................................................................. 51
4.10.6 HART® connection .............................................................................................................. 55
5 Start-up 57
5.1 Switching on the power .................................................................................................. 57

5.2 Starting the signal converter ......................................................................................... 57
6 Operation 58
6.1 Display and operating elements .................................................................................... 58

6.1.1 Display in measuring mode with 2 or 3 measured values ................................................... 60
6.1.2 Display for selection of submenu and functions, 3 lines ..................................................... 60
6.1.3 Display when setting parameters, 4 lines ............................................................................ 61
6.1.4 Display when previewing parameters, 4 lines...................................................................... 61
6.1.5 Using an IR interface (option) ............................................................................................... 62
6.2 Zero calibration (menu C1.1.1)....................................................................................... 63
6.3 Menu structure ............................................................................................................... 65
6.4 Function tables ............................................................................................................... 68
6.4.1 Menu A, Quick Setup ............................................................................................................. 68
6.4.2 Menu B, test .......................................................................................................................... 70
6.4.3 Menu C, Setup ....................................................................................................................... 71
6.4.4 Set free units......................................................................................................................... 87
6.5 Description of functions ................................................................................................. 88
6.5.1 Reset totaliser in the menu "Quick Setup"........................................................................... 88
6.5.2 Deleting error messages in the menu "Quick Setup" .......................................................... 88
6.5.3 Operation Mode (menu A9) ................................................................................................... 89
6.5.4 Density calibration (menu C1.2.1)......................................................................................... 90
6.5.5 Temperature/density tables ................................................................................................. 92
6.5.6 Density mode (menu C1.2.2) ................................................................................................. 95
6.5.7 Pipe diameter (menu C1.1.3) ................................................................................................ 96
6.5.8 Concentration measurement (menu C2).............................................................................. 96
6.5.9 Flow direction (menu C1.3.1) ................................................................................................ 96
6.5.10 Pressure suppression......................................................................................................... 97
6.5.11 System control .................................................................................................................... 99
6.5.12 2 Ph. Threshold (menu C1.5.3) ......................................................................................... 100
6.5.13 Diagnosis messages (menu C1.5.7....C1.5.14).................................................................. 101
6.5.14 Optical keys (C6.2.4).......................................................................................................... 101
6.5.15 Graphic page (menu C6.5)................................................................................................. 101
6.5.16 Save settings (menu C6.6.2).............................................................................................. 101
6.5.17 Load settings (menu C6.6.3) ............................................................................................. 101
Page 164 of 307

MFC 400 CONTENTS
6.5.18 Passwords (Menu 6.6.4 Quick Set; Menu 6.6.5 Setup) ..................................................... 102
6.5.19 Date and time (C6.6.6)....................................................................................................... 102
6.5.20 Quick Access (C6.6.7) ........................................................................................................ 102
6.5.21 Low flow cutoff .................................................................................................................. 102
6.5.22 Time constant.................................................................................................................... 103
6.5.23 Dual phase pulse output ................................................................................................... 103
6.5.24 Timeouts in programming mode ...................................................................................... 103
6.5.25 Output hardware ............................................................................................................... 104
6.6 Status messages and diagnostic information.............................................................. 104
6.7 Function tests and troubleshooting ............................................................................. 113
6.8 Diagnostic functions ..................................................................................................... 115
6.8.1 Temperature (menu B2.7) .................................................................................................. 115
6.8.2 Frequency (menu B2.10)..................................................................................................... 115
6.8.3 Drive level (menu B2.11)..................................................................................................... 115
6.8.4 Sensor levels A and B (menu B2.12, B2.13) ....................................................................... 116
6.8.5 2 phase signal (menu B2.14)............................................................................................... 116
7 Service 117
7.1 Replacing the signal converter electronics ................................................................. 117

7.2 Driver or sensor coil fault ............................................................................................ 118
7.2.1 OPTIMASS 1000................................................................................................................... 118
7.2.2 OPTIMASS 2000................................................................................................................... 119
7.2.3 OPTIMASS 3000................................................................................................................... 120
7.2.4 OPTIMASS 6000................................................................................................................... 121
7.2.5 OPTIMASS 7000................................................................................................................... 122
7.3 Spare parts availability................................................................................................. 123
7.4 Availability of services .................................................................................................. 123
7.5 Returning the device to the manufacturer................................................................... 123
7.5.1 General information............................................................................................................ 123
7.5.2 Form (for copying) to accompany a returned device.......................................................... 124
7.6 Disposal ........................................................................................................................ 124
8 Technical data 125
8.1 Measuring principle...................................................................................................... 125

8.2 Technical data............................................................................................................... 125
8.3 Dimensions and weights .............................................................................................. 136
8.3.1 Housing ............................................................................................................................... 136
8.3.2 Mounting plate, field housing ............................................................................................. 136
9 Description of HART interface 137
9.1 General description ...................................................................................................... 137

9.2 Software history ........................................................................................................... 137
9.3 Connection variants...................................................................................................... 138
9.3.1 Point-to-Point connection - analogue / digital mode......................................................... 139
9.3.2 Multi-Drop connection (2-wire connection) ....................................................................... 140
9.3.3 Multi-Drop connection (3-wire connection) ....................................................................... 141
9.4 Inputs/outputs and HART® dynamic variables and device variables.......................... 142
Page 165 of 307

1 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS MFC 400
1.1 Software history

The "Electronic Revision" (ER) is consulted to document the revision status of electronic
equipment according to NE 53 for all GDC devices. It is easy to see from the ER whether
troubleshooting or larger changes in the electronic equipment have taken place and how that
has affected the compatibility.
Changes and effect on compatibility

1 Downwards compatible changes and fault repair with no effect on operation (e.g. spelling
mistakes on display)
2-_ Downwards compatible hardware and/or software change of interfaces:
H HART®
P PROFIBUS
F Foundation Fieldbus
M Modbus
X all interfaces
3-_ Downwards compatible hardware and/or software change of inputs and outputs:
I Current output
F, P Frequency / pulse output
S Status output
C Control input
CI Current input
X all inputs and outputs
4 Downwards compatible changes with new functions
5 Incompatible changes, i.e. electronic equipment must be changed.
INFORMATION!
In the table below, "x" is a placeholder for possible multi-digit alphanumeric combinations,
depending on the available version.
Release date Electronic Revision Changes and Documentation

compatibility
2012-09-06 ER 1.0.0x - MA MFC400 R01
2013-03-12 ER 1.0.1x 1 MA MFC400 R02
2013-06-27 ER 1.0.2x 1; 2-M; 2-H MA MFC400 R02
2013-06-27 ER 1.0.3x 1; 2-F; 2-P; 2-X MA MFC400 R02
2013-11-04 ER 1.0.4x 2-H; 3-P; 3-F MA MFC400 R03
2014-05-06 ER 1.0.5x 1 MA MFC400 R03
2014-08-08 ER 1.0.6x 1; 3-P; 3-I; 2-H MA MFC400 R03
Page 166 of 307

MFC 400 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1
1.2 Intended use

DANGER!
documentation.
WARNING!
If the device is not used according to the operating conditions (refer to chapter Technical data),
the intended protection could be affected.
1.3 Certifications
CE marking
The device fulfils the statutory requirements of the following EC directives:

• Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC
• EMC Directive 2004/108/EC
as well as
• EN 61010
• EMC specification acc. to EN 61326/A1
• NAMUR recommendations NE 21 and NE 43
The manufacturer certifies successful testing of the product by applying the CE marking.
DANGER!
documentation.
Page 167 of 307

1.4 Safety instructions from the manufacturer

1.4.1 Copyright and data protection
The contents of this document have been created with great care. Nevertheless, we provide no
guarantee that the contents are correct, complete or up-to-date.
The contents and works in this document are subject to copyright. Contributions from third
parties are identified as such. Reproduction, processing, dissemination and any type of use
beyond what is permitted under copyright requires written authorisation from the respective
author and/or the manufacturer.
The manufacturer tries always to observe the copyrights of others, and to draw on works created
in-house or works in the public domain.
The collection of personal data (such as names, street addresses or e-mail addresses) in the
manufacturer's documents is always on a voluntary basis whenever possible. Whenever
feasible, it is always possible to make use of the offerings and services without providing any
personal data.
We draw your attention to the fact that data transmission over the Internet (e.g. when
communicating by e-mail) may involve gaps in security. It is not possible to protect such data
completely against access by third parties.
We hereby expressly prohibit the use of the contact data published as part of our duty to publish
an imprint for the purpose of sending us any advertising or informational materials that we have
not expressly requested.
1.4.2 Disclaimer
The manufacturer will not be liable for any damage of any kind by using its product, including,
but not limited to direct, indirect or incidental and consequential damages.
This disclaimer does not apply in case the manufacturer has acted on purpose or with gross
negligence. In the event any applicable law does not allow such limitations on implied warranties
or the exclusion of limitation of certain damages, you may, if such law applies to you, not be
subject to some or all of the above disclaimer, exclusions or limitations.
Any product purchased from the manufacturer is warranted in accordance with the relevant
product documentation and our Terms and Conditions of Sale.
The manufacturer reserves the right to alter the content of its documents, including this
disclaimer in any way, at any time, for any reason, without prior notification, and will not be liable
in any way for possible consequences of such changes.
Page 168 of 307

MFC 400 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1
1.4.3 Product liability and warranty

The operator shall bear responsibility for the suitability of the device for the specific purpose.
The manufacturer accepts no liability for the consequences of misuse by the operator. Improper
installation or operation of the devices (systems) will cause the warranty to be void. The
respective "Standard Terms and Conditions" which form the basis for the sales contract shall
also apply.
1.4.4 Information concerning the documentation

To prevent any injury to the user or damage to the device it is essential that you read the
information in this document and observe applicable national standards, safety requirements
and accident prevention regulations.
If this document is not in your native language and if you have any problems understanding the
text, we advise you to contact your local office for assistance. The manufacturer can not accept
responsibility for any damage or injury caused by misunderstanding of the information in this
document.
efficient use of this device. Special considerations and precautions are also described in the
document, which appear in the form of icons as shown below.
Page 169 of 307

1.4.5 Warnings and symbols used

Safety warnings are indicated by the following symbols.
DANGER!
This warning refers to the immediate danger when working with electricity.
DANGER!
This warning refers to the immediate danger of burns caused by heat or hot surfaces.
DANGER!
This warning refers to the immediate danger when using this device in a hazardous atmosphere.
DANGER!
These warnings must be observed without fail. Even partial disregard of this warning can lead to
serious health problems and even death. There is also the risk of seriously damaging the device
or parts of the operator's plant.
WARNING!
Disregarding this safety warning, even if only in part, poses the risk of serious health problems.
There is also the risk of damaging the device or parts of the operator's plant.
CAUTION!
Disregarding these instructions can result in damage to the device or to parts of the operator's
plant.
INFORMATION!
These instructions contain important information for the handling of the device.
LEGAL NOTICE!
This note contains information on statutory directives and standards.
• HANDLING
This symbol designates all instructions for actions to be carried out by the operator in the
specified sequence.
i RESULT
This symbol refers to all important consequences of the previous actions.
1.5 Safety instructions for the operator

WARNING!
In general, devices from the manufacturer may only be installed, commissioned, operated and
maintained by properly trained and authorized personnel.
efficient use of this device.
Page 170 of 307

MFC 400 DEVICE DESCRIPTION 2
2.1 Scope of delivery

INFORMATION!
INFORMATION!
INFORMATION!
Figure 2-1: Scope of delivery

1 Device in the version as ordered
2 Documentation (calibration protocol, factory and material certification if ordered, CD-ROM with product documenta-
tion for flow sensor and signal converter)
3 Signal cable (only for remote version)
Signal converter/measuring sensor combination possibilities

Flow sensor Flow sensor + signal converter MFC 400
Compact Remote field housing

Page 171 of 307

2 DEVICE DESCRIPTION MFC 400
2.2 Device description

Your measuring device is supplied ready for operation. The factory settings for the operating
data have been made in accordance with your order specifications.
The following versions are available:

• Compact version (the signal converter is mounted directly on the flow sensor)
• Remote version (electrical connection to the flow sensor via field current and signal cable)
Figure 2-2: Versions with bent tube

1 Compact version
2 Flow sensor with connection box
3 Field housing
Figure 2-3: Versions with straight tube

1 Compact version
2 Flow sensor with connection box
3 Field housing
Page 172 of 307

2.2.1 Field housing
Figure 2-4: Construction of the field housing

1 Cover for electronics and display
2 Cover for power supply and inputs/outputs terminal compartment
3 Cover for measuring sensor terminal compartment
4 Cable entry for measuring sensor signal cable
5 Cable entry for measuring sensor field current cable
6 Cable entry for power supply
7 Cable entry for inputs and outputs
8 Mounting plate for pipe and wall mounting
INFORMATION!
Each time a housing cover is opened, the thread should be cleaned and greased. Use only resin-
free and acid-free grease.
Ensure that the housing gasket is properly fitted, clean and undamaged.
Page 173 of 307

2 DEVICE DESCRIPTION MFC 400
2.3 Nameplates
INFORMATION!
2.3.1 Example of a nameplate
Figure 2-5: Example of a nameplate

1 Approvals-related information: Ex approval, EC type test certificate, hygienic approvals, etc.
2 Approvals-related thresholds
3 Additional information on documentation, calibration and patents
4 Protection category
5 Electrical connection data
6 Software and hardware revision (Electronics Revision), CG number, order number for signal converter and measuring
sensor
7 Product description
8 Manufacturer and manufacturer logo
Page 174 of 307

2.3.2 Electrical connection data of inputs/outputs (example of basic version)
Figure 2-6: Example of a nameplate for electrical connection data of inputs and outputs
1 Power supply (AC: L and N; DC: L+ and L-; PE for ≥ 24 VAC; FE for ≤ 24 VAC and DC)
2 Connection data of connection terminal D/D-
3 Connection data of connection terminal C/C-
4 Connection data of connection terminal B/B-
5 Connection data of connection terminal A/A-; A+ only operable in the basic version
• A = active mode; the signal converter supplies the power for connection of the subsequent
devices
• P = passive mode; external power supply required for operation of the subsequent devices
• N/C = connection terminals not connected
Page 175 of 307

3.1 General notes on installation

INFORMATION!
INFORMATION!
INFORMATION!
3.2 Storage
• Store the device in a dry, dust-free location.
• Avoid continuous direct sunlight.
• Store the device in its original packing.
• Storage temperature: -50...+70°C / -58...+158°F
3.3 Transport
Signal converter
• No special requirements.
Compact version
• Do not lift the device by the signal converter housing.
• Do not use lifting chains.
• To transport flange devices, use lifting straps. Wrap these around both process connections.
3.4 Installation specifications

INFORMATION!
The following precautions must be taken to ensure reliable installation.
• Make sure that there is adequate space to the sides.
• Protect the signal converter from direct sunlight and install a sun shade if necessary.
• Signal converters installed in control cabinets require adequate cooling, e.g. by fan or heat
exchanger.
• Do not expose the signal converter to intense vibrations. The measuring devices are tested
for a vibration level in accordance with IEC 68-2-64.
Page 176 of 307

3.5 Mounting of the compact version

INFORMATION!
The signal converter is mounted directly on the flow sensor. For installation of the flowmeter,
please observe the instructions in the supplied product documentation for the flow sensor.
3.6 Mounting the field housing, remote version

CAUTION!
Remarks for sanitary applications
• To prevent contamination and dirt deposits behind the mounting plate, a cover plug must be
installed between the wall and the mounting plate.
• Pipe mounting is not suitable for sanitary applications!
INFORMATION!
3.6.1 Pipe mounting
Figure 3-1: Pipe mounting of the field housing
1 Fix the signal converter to the pipe.

2 Fasten the signal converter using standard U-bolts and washers.
3 Tighten the nuts.
Page 177 of 307

3.6.2 Wall mounting
Figure 3-2: Wall mounting of the field housing
1 Prepare the holes with the aid of the mounting plate. For further information refer to Mounting
plate, field housing on page 136.
2 Fasten the mounting plate securely to the wall.
3 Screw the signal converter to the mounting plate with the nuts and washers.
Mounting multiple devices next to each other
a ≥ 600 mm / 23.6"
b ≥ 250 mm / 9.8"
Page 178 of 307

3.6.3 Turning the display of the field housing version
Figure 3-3: Turning the display of the field housing version
The display of the field housing version can be turned in 90° increments.
1 Unscrew the cover from the display and operation control unit.
2 Using a suitable tool, pull out the two metal puller devices to the left and right of the display.
3 Pull out the display between the two metal puller devices and rotate it to the required position.
4 Slide the display and then the metal puller devices back into the housing.
5 Re-fit the cover and tighten it by hand.
CAUTION!
The ribbon cable of the display must not be folded or twisted repeatedly.
INFORMATION!
Page 179 of 307


DANGER!
DANGER!
DANGER!
documentation.
WARNING!
specialists.
INFORMATION!
4.2 Important notes on electrical connection

DANGER!
Electrical connection is carried out in conformity with the VDE 0100 directive "Regulations for
electrical power installations with line voltages up to 1000 V" or equivalent national regulations.
CAUTION!
• Use suitable cable entries for the various electrical cables.
• The measuring sensor and signal converter have been configured together at the factory. For
this reason, please connect the devices in pairs.
Page 180 of 307

4.3 Signal cable requirements

CAUTION!
It is strongly recommended that the signal cable for remote meters is provided by the
manufacturer.
Specifications for standard signal cables

• 5 twisted pair circuits (24 AWG)
• Insulation thickness of cables: ≥ 0.2 mm / 0.008")
• Each cable pair shielded with foil and drain wire
• Overall foil/braid shield
• Casing colour: grey
• Colour of wires:
Pair 1: yellow/black
Pair 2: green/black
Pair 3: blue/black
Pair 4: red/black
Pair 5: white/black
• Test voltage: ≥ 100 VAC
• Temperature range: -40...+85°C / -40...+185°F
• Capacity between cables: ≤ 41 pF/m
• Capacity compared to shielding: ≤ 73 pF/m
• Inductance: ≤ 0.8 µH/m
Specifications for cables in hazardous areas

• 5 twisted pair circuits (24 AWG)
• Insulation thickness of cables: ≥ 0.2 mm / 0.008")
• Each cable pair shielded with foil and drain wire
• Overall foil/braid shield
• Casing colour: blue
• Colour of wires:
Pair 1: yellow/black
Pair 2: green/black
Pair 3: blue/black
Pair 4: red/black
Pair 5: white/black
• Test voltage: ≥ 100 VAC
• Temperature range: -40...+85°C / -40...+185°F
• Capacity between cables: ≤ 41 pF/m
• Capacity compared to shielding: ≤ 73 pF/m
• Inductance: ≤ 0.8 µH/m
Page 181 of 307

4.4 Connecting the signal cables

DANGER!
Cables may only be connected when the power is switched off.
DANGER!
DANGER!
documentation.
WARNING!
specialists.
Page 182 of 307

4.4.1 Connection of signal cable - Field housing and connection box for sensor
Figure 4-1: Connection of signal cable - Field housing and connection box for sensor
1 Unscrew the terminal compartment cover.

2 Pass the prepared signal cable through the cable entry.
3 Secure the signal cable using the clip.
4 Connect the electrical conductors as shown. The shielding must also be connected to the
spring terminal.
5 Re-fit the cover and tighten it by hand.
Cable pair Colour

1 yellow X1 SA+
1 black X1 SA-
2 green X1 SB+
2 black X1 SB-
3 blue X2 T1
3 black X2 T2
4 red X2 T3
4 black X2 T4
5 white X3 DR+
5 black X3 DR-
INFORMATION!
Page 183 of 307

4.4.2 Connection diagram

DANGER!
Figure 4-2: Connection diagram

1 Terminal compartment for signal converter
2 Terminal compartment for measuring sensor
3 Connect shielding to spring terminal (drain wire and overall shield)
Cable pair Colour

1 yellow X1 SA+
1 black X1 SA-
2 green X1 SB+
2 black X1 SB-
3 blue X2 T1
3 black X2 T2
4 red X2 T3
4 black X2 T4
5 white X3 DR+
5 black X3 DR-
Page 184 of 307

4.5 Grounding the flow sensor

DANGER!
There should be no difference in potential between the flow sensor and the housing or protective
earth of the signal converter!
• The flow sensor must be properly grounded.

• The grounding cable should not transmit any interference voltages.
• Do not use the grounding cable to connect more than one device to ground.
• The flow sensors are connected to ground by means of a functional grounding conductor FE.
• In hazardous areas, grounding is used at the same time for equipotential bonding. Additional
grounding instructions are provided in the supplementary "Ex documentation", which are
only supplied together with hazardous area equipment.
Page 185 of 307

4.6 Connecting power – all housing variants

DANGER!
DANGER!
documentation.
• The protection category depends on the housing versions (IP65...67 to IEC 529 / EN 60529 or
NEMA4/4X/6).
• The housings of the devices, which are designed to protect the electronic equipment from
dust and moisture, should be kept well closed at all times. Creepage distances and
clearances are dimensioned to VDE 0110 and IEC 664 for pollution severity 2. Supply circuits
are designed for overvoltage category III and the output circuits for overvoltage category II.
• Fuse protection (IN ≤ 16 A) for the infeed power circuit, as well as a separator (switch, circuit
breaker) to isolate the signal converter must be provided close to the device. The separator
must be marked as the separator for this device.
100...230 VAC (tolerance range: -15% / +10%)

• Note the power supply voltage and frequency (50...60 Hz) on the nameplate.
• The protective ground terminal PE of the power supply must be connected to the separate U-
clamp terminal in the terminal compartment of the signal converter
INFORMATION!
240 VAC + 5% is included in the tolerance range.
24 VDC (tolerance range: -55% / +30%)

24 VAC/DC (tolerance range: AC: -15% / +10%; DC: -25% / +30%)
• Note the data on the nameplate!
• For measurement process reasons, a functional ground FE must be connected to the
separate U-clamp terminal in the terminal compartment of the signal converter.
• When connecting to functional extra-low voltages, provide a facility for protective separation
(PELV) (acc. to VDE 0100 / VDE 0106 and/or IEC 364 / IEC 536 or relevant national
regulations).
INFORMATION!
For 24 VDC, 12 VDC - 10% is included in the tolerance range.
Page 186 of 307

Power supply connection
1 100...230 VAC (-15% / +10%), 22 VA

2 24 VDC (-55% / +30%), 12 W
3 24 VAC/DC (AC: -15% / +10%; DC: -25% / +30%), 22 VA or 12 W
4.7 Inputs and outputs, overview

4.7.1 Combinations of the inputs/outputs (I/Os)
Basic version
• Has 1 current output, 1 pulse output and 2 status outputs / limit switches.
• The pulse output can be set as status output/limit switch and one of the status outputs as a
control input.
Ex i version
• Current outputs can be active or passive.
• Optionally available also with Foundation Fieldbus and Profibus PA
Modular version
Bus systems
• The device allows intrinsically safe and non intrinsically safe bus interfaces in combination
with additional modules.
• For connection and operation of bus systems, note the supplementary instructions.
Ex option
• For hazardous areas, all of the input/output variants for the housing designs C and F can be
delivered with terminal compartment in Ex d (pressure-resistant casing) or Ex e (increased
safety).
• For connection and operation of Ex devices, note the supplementary instructions.
Page 187 of 307

4.7.2 Description of the CG number
Figure 4-3: Marking (CG number) of the electronics module and input/output variants
1 ID number: 3
2 ID number: 0 = standard; 9 = special
3 Power supply option
4 Display (language versions)
5 Input/output version (I/O)
6 1st optional module for connection terminal A
7 2nd optional module for connection terminal B
The last 3 digits of the CG number (5, 6 and 7) indicate the assignment of the terminal
connections. Please refer to the following examples.
Examples for CG number

CG 330 11 100 100...230 VAC & standard display; basic I/O: Ia or Ip & Sp/Cp & Sp & Pp/Sp
CG 330 11 7FK 100...230 VAC & standard display; modular I/O: Ia & PN/SN and optional module PN/SN & CN
CG 330 81 4EB 24 VDC & standard display; modular I/O: Ia & Pa/Sa and optional module Pp/Sp & Ip
Description of abbreviations and CG identifier for possible optional modules

on terminals A and B
Abbreviation Identifier for CG No. Description
Ia A Active current output
Ip B Passive current output
Pa / Sa C Active pulse output, frequency output, status output or limit switch
(changeable)
Pp / Sp E Passive pulse output, frequency output, status output or limit switch
(changeable)
PN / SN F Passive pulse output, frequency output, status output or limit switch acc.
to NAMUR (changeable)
Ca G Active control input
Cp K Passive control input
CN H Active control input to NAMUR
Signal converter monitors cable breaks and short circuits acc. to
EN 60947-5-6. Errors indicated on LC display. Error messages possible
via status output.
- 8 No additional module installed
- 0 No further module possible
Page 188 of 307

4.7.3 Fixed, non-alterable input/output versions

• Connection terminal A+ is only operable in the basic input/output version.
Basic I/Os (standard)

100 Ip + HART® passive 1 Sp / Cp passive 2 Sp passive Pp / Sp passive 2
Ia + HART® active 1
Ex i I/Os (option)
200 Ia + HART® active PN / SN NAMUR 2
300 Ip + HART® passive PN / SN NAMUR 2
210 Ia active PN / SN NAMUR Ia + HART® active PN / SN NAMUR 2

Cp passive 2
310 Ia active PN / SN NAMUR Ip + HART® passive PN / SN NAMUR 2
Cp passive 2
220 Ip passive PN / SN NAMUR Ia + HART® active PN / SN NAMUR 2
Cp passive 2
320 Ip passive PN / SN NAMUR Ip + HART® passive PN / SN NAMUR 2
Cp passive 2
PROFIBUS PA (Ex i) (option)

D00 PA+ PA- PA+ PA-
D10 Ia active PN / SN NAMUR PA+ PA- PA+ PA-
D20 Ip passive PN / SN NAMUR PA+ PA- PA+ PA-
Page 189 of 307

FOUNDATION Fieldbus (Ex i) (option)

E00 V/D+ V/D- V/D+ V/D-
E10 Ia active PN / SN NAMUR V/D+ V/D- V/D+ V/D-
E20 Ip passive PN / SN NAMUR V/D+ V/D- V/D+ V/D-
1 Function changed by reconnecting
2 Changeable
Page 190 of 307

4.7.4 Alterable input/output versions

• Term. = (connection) terminal
Modular I/Os (option)

4__ max. 2 optional modules for term. A + B Ia + HART® active Pa / Sa active 1
8__ max. 2 optional modules for term. A + B Ip + HART® passive Pa / Sa active 1
6__ max. 2 optional modules for term. A + B Ia + HART® active Pp / Sp passive 1
B__ max. 2 optional modules for term. A + B Ip + HART® passive Pp / Sp passive 1
7__ max. 2 optional modules for term. A + B Ia + HART® active PN / SN NAMUR 1
C__ max. 2 optional modules for term. A + B Ip + HART® passive PN / SN NAMUR 1
PROFIBUS PA (option)
D__ max. 2 optional modules for term. A + B PA+ (2) PA- (2) PA+ (1) PA- (1)
FOUNDATION Fieldbus (option)

E__ max. 2 optional modules for term. A + B V/D+ (2) V/D- (2) V/D+ (1) V/D- (1)
PROFIBUS DP (option)
F_0 1 optional module for Termina- RxD/TxD- RxD/TxD- Termina- RxD/TxD- RxD/TxD-
term. A tion P P(2) N(2) tion N P(1) N(1)
Modbus (option)
G__ 2 max. 2 optional modules for term. A + B Common Sign. B Sign. A
(D1) (D0)
H__ 3 max. 2 optional modules for term. A + B Common Sign. B Sign. A
(D1) (D0)
1 Changeable
2 Not activated bus terminator
3 Activated bus terminator
Page 191 of 307

4.8 Description of the inputs and outputs

4.8.1 Current output
INFORMATION!
The current outputs must be connected depending on the version! Which I/O versions and
inputs/outputs are installed in your signal converter are indicated on the sticker in the cover of
the terminal compartment.
• All outputs are electrically isolated from each other and from all other circuits.
• All operating data and functions can be adjusted.
• Passive mode:
External power Uext ≤ 32 VDC at I ≤ 22 mA
• Active mode:
Load impedance RL ≤ 1 kΩ at I ≤ 22 mA;
RL ≤ 450 Ω at I ≤ 22 mA for Ex i outputs
• Self-monitoring: interruption or load impedance too high in the current output loop
• Error message possible via status output, error indication on LC display.
• Current value error detection can be adjusted. Default setting: 3.6 mA
• Automatic range conversion via threshold or control input. The setting range for the
threshold is between 5 and 80% of Q100%, ± 0...5% hysteresis (corresponding ratio from
smaller to larger range of 1:20 to 1:1.25).
Signaling of the active range possible via a status output (adjustable).
• Forward/reverse flow measurement (F/R mode) is possible.
INFORMATION!
For further information refer to Description of the inputs and outputs on page 38 and refer to
Technical data on page 125.
DANGER!
documentation.
Page 192 of 307

4.8.2 Pulse output and frequency output

INFORMATION!
Depending on the version, the pulse and frequency outputs must be connected passively or
actively or according to NAMUR EN 60947-5-6! Which I/O version and inputs/outputs are
installed in your signal converter are indicated on the sticker in the cover of the terminal
compartment.
• All outputs are electrically isolated from each other and from all other circuits.
• Passive mode:
External power supply required: Uext ≤ 32 VDC
I ≤ 20 mA at f ≤ 10 kHz (over range up to fmax ≤ 12 kHz)
I ≤ 100 mA at f ≤ 100 Hz
• Active mode:
Use of the internal power supply: Unom = 24 VDC
I ≤ 20 mA at f ≤ 10 kHz (over range up to fmax ≤ 12 kHz)
I ≤ 20 mA at f ≤ 100 Hz
• NAMUR mode:
Passive in accordance with EN 60947-5-6;
f ≤ 10 kHz (over range up to fmax ≤ 12 kHz)
• Scaling:
Frequency output: in pulses per time unit (e.g. 1000 pulses/s at Q100%);
Pulse output: quantity per pulse.
• Pulse width:
symmetric (pulse duty factor 1:1, independent of output frequency)
automatic (with fixed pulse width, duty factor approx. 1:1 at Q100%) or
fixed (pulse width adjustable as required from 0.05 ms...2 s)
• Forward/reverse flow measurement (F/R mode) is possible.
• All pulse and frequency outputs can also be used as a status output / limit switch.
INFORMATION!
DANGER!
documentation.
Page 193 of 307

4.8.3 Status output and limit switch

INFORMATION!
Depending on the version, the status outputs and limit switches must be connected passively or
actively or according to NAMUR EN 60947-5-6! Which I/O version and inputs/outputs are
installed in your signal converter are indicated on the sticker in the cover of the terminal
compartment.
• The status outputs / limit switches are electrically isolated from each other and from all
other circuits.
• The output stages of the status outputs / limit switches during simple active or passive
operation behave like relay contacts and can be connected with any polarity.
• Passive mode:
External power supply required: Uext ≤ 32 VDC; I ≤ 100 mA
• Active mode:
Use of the internal power supply: Unom = 24 VDC; I ≤ 20 mA
• NAMUR mode:
Passive in accordance with EN 60947-5-6
• For information on the adjustable operating states refer to Function tables on page 68.
INFORMATION!
DANGER!
documentation.
Page 194 of 307

4.8.4 Control input

INFORMATION!
Depending on the version, the control inputs must be connected passively or actively or
according to NAMUR EN 60947-5-6! Which I/O version and inputs/outputs are installed in your
signal converter are indicated on the sticker in the cover of the terminal compartment.
• All control inputs are electrically isolated from each other and from all other circuits.
• Passive mode:
External power supply required: Uext ≤ 32 VDC
• Active mode:
Use of the internal power supply: Unom = 24 VDC
• NAMUR mode:
In accordance with EN 60947-5-6
(Active control input to NAMUR EN 60947-5-6: signal converter monitors cable breaks and
short circuits acc. to EN 60947-5-6. Errors indicated on LC display. Error messages possible
via status output.
• For information on the adjustable operating states refer to Function tables on page 68.
INFORMATION!
DANGER!
documentation.
Page 195 of 307

4.9 Electrical connection of the inputs and outputs

INFORMATION!
4.9.1 Field housing, electrical connection of the inputs and outputs

DANGER!
INFORMATION!
For frequencies above 100 Hz, shielded cables are to be used in order to reduce effects from
electrical interferences (EMC).
Figure 4-4: Terminal compartment for inputs and outputs in field housing
1 Open the housing cover.

2 Push the prepared cable through the cable entry and connect the necessary conductors.
3 Connect the shield if necessary.
4 Close the touch guard.
5 Close the housing cover.
INFORMATION!
Page 196 of 307

4.9.2 Laying electrical cables correctly
Figure 4-5: Protect housing from dust and water
1 Lay the cable in a loop just before the housing.

2 Tighten the screw connection of the cable entry securely.
3 Never mount the housing with the cable entries facing upwards.
4 Seal cable entries that are not needed with a plug.
Page 197 of 307

4.10 Description of the inputs and outputs

4.10.1 Important notes
INFORMATION!
Depending on the version, the inputs/outputs must be connected passively or actively or acc. to
NAMUR EN 60947-5-6! Which I/O version and inputs/outputs are installed in your signal
converter are indicated on the sticker in the cover of the terminal compartment.
• All groups are electrically isolated from each other and from all other input and output
circuits.
• Passive mode: An external power supply is necessary to operate (activation) the subsequent
devices (Uext).
• Active mode: The signal converter supplies the power for operation (activation) of the
subsequent devices, observe max. operating data.
• Terminals that are not used should not have any conductive connection to other electrically
conductive parts.
DANGER!
documentation.
Description of used abbreviations

Ia Ip Current output active or passive
Pa Pp Pulse/frequency output active or passive
PN Pulse/frequency output passive acc. to NAMUR EN 60947-5-6
Sa Sp Status output/limit switch active or passive
SN Status output/limit switch passive acc. to NAMUR EN 60947-5-6
Ca Cp Control input active or passive
CN Control input active acc. to NAMUR EN 60947-5-6:
Signal converter monitors cable breaks and short circuits acc. to EN 60947-5-6. Errors
indicated on LC display. Error messages possible via status output.
Page 198 of 307

4.10.2 Description of the electrical symbols
mA meter
0...20 mA or 4...20 mA and other
RL is the internal resistance of the measuring point including the cable
resistance
DC voltage source (Uext), external power supply, any connection polarity
DC voltage source (Uext), observe connection polarity according to

connection diagrams
Internal DC voltage source
Controlled internal power source in the device
Electronic or electromagnetic counter

At frequencies above 100 Hz, shielded cables must be used to connect the
counters.
Ri Internal resistance of the counter
Button, NO contact or similar
Table 4-1: Description of symbols
Page 199 of 307

4.10.3 Basic inputs/outputs

CAUTION!
Observe connection polarity.
INFORMATION!
HART® connection on page 55.
Current output active (HART®), basic I/Os

• Uint, nom = 24 VDC nominal
• I ≤ 22 mA
• RL ≤ 1 kΩ
Figure 4-6: Current output active Ia
Current output passive (HART®), basic I/Os

• Uint, nom = 24 VDC nominal
• Uext ≤ 32 VDC
• I ≤ 22 mA
• U0 ≥ 1.8 V
• RL ≤ (Uext - U0) / Imax
Figure 4-7: Current output passive Ip
Page 200 of 307

INFORMATION!
• Compact and field housing versions: Shield connected via the cable terminals in the terminal
compartment.
• Any connection polarity.
Pulse/frequency output passive, basic I/Os

• Uext ≤ 32 VDC
• fmax in the operating menu set to fmax ≤ 100 Hz:
I ≤ 100 mA
open:
closed:
U0, max = 0.2 V at I ≤ 10 mA
U0, max = 2 V at I ≤ 100 mA
• fmax in operating menu set to 100 Hz < fmax ≤ 10 kHz:
I ≤ 20 mA
open:
closed:
U0, max = 1.5 V at I ≤ 1 mA
U0, max = 2.5 V at I ≤ 10 mA
U0, max = 5.0 V at I ≤ 20 mA
• If the following maximum load impedance RL, max is exceeded, the load impedance RL must
be reduced accordingly by parallel connection of R:
f ≤ 100 Hz: RL, max = 47 kΩ
f ≤ 1 kHz: RL, max = 10 kΩ
• The minimum load impedance RL, min is calculated as follows:
RL, min = (Uext - U0) / Imax
• Can also be set as a status output. For the electrical connection refer to status output
connection diagram.
Figure 4-8: Pulse/frequency output passive Pp
Page 201 of 307

INFORMATION!
Status output / limit switch passive, basic I/Os

• Uext ≤ 32 VDC
• I ≤ 100 mA
• RL, max = 47 kΩ
• open:
closed:
U0, max = 0.2 V at I ≤ 10 mA
U0, max = 2 V at I ≤ 100 mA
• The output is open when the device is de-energised.
• X stands for the connection terminals B, C or D. The functions of the connection terminals
depend on the settings (for details refer to Function tables on page 68).
Figure 4-9: Status output / limit switch passive Sp
Control input passive, basic I/Os

• 8 V ≤ Uext ≤ 32 VDC
• Imax = 6.5 mA at Uext ≤ 24 VDC
Imax = 8.2 mA at Uext ≤ 32 VDC
• Switching point for identifying "contact open or closed":
Contact open (off): U0 ≤ 2.5 V with Inom = 0.4 mA
Contact closed (on): U0 ≥ 8 V with Inom = 2.8 mA
• Can also be set as a status output. For the electrical connection refer to status output
connection diagram.
Figure 4-10: Control input passive Cp

1 Signal
Page 202 of 307

4.10.4 Modular inputs/outputs and bus systems

CAUTION!
INFORMATION!
• For further information refer to Description of the inputs and outputs on page 32.
• The electrical connection of the bus systems are described in the supplementary instructions
of the respective bus system.
Current output active (only current output terminals C/C- have HART® capability),
modular I/Os
• Uint, nom = 24 VDC
• I ≤ 22 mA
• RL ≤ 1 kΩ
• X designates the connection terminals A, B or C, depending on the version of the signal
converter.
Figure 4-11: Current output active Ia
Current output passive (only current output terminals C/C- have HART® capability),
modular I/Os
• Uext ≤ 32 VDC
• I ≤ 22 mA
• U0 ≥ 1.8 V
• X designates the connection terminals A, B or C, depending on the version of the signal
converter.
Figure 4-12: Current output passive Ip
Page 203 of 307

INFORMATION!
compartment.
Pulse/frequency output active, modular I/Os

• Unom = 24 VDC
I ≤ 20 mA
open:
I ≤ 0.05 mA
closed:
U0, nom = 24 V at I = 20 mA
I ≤ 20 mA
open:
I ≤ 0.05 mA
closed:
U0, nom = 22.5 V at I = 1 mA
U0, nom = 21.5 V at I = 10 mA
U0, nom = 19 V at I = 20 mA
f ≤ 100 Hz: RL, max = 47 kΩ
RL, min = U0 / Imax
• X designates the connection terminals A, B or D, depending on the version of the signal
converter.
Figure 4-13: Pulse / frequency output active Pa
Page 204 of 307

Pulse/frequency output passive, modular I/Os

• Uext ≤ 32 VDC
I ≤ 100 mA
open:
closed:
U0, max = 0.2 V at I ≤ 10 mA
U0, max = 2 V at I ≤ 100 mA
open:
closed:
U0, max = 1.5 V at I ≤ 1 mA
U0, max =2.5 V at I ≤ 10 mA
U0, max = 5 V at I ≤ 20 mA
f ≤ 100 Hz: RL, max = 47 kΩ
• Can also be set as status output. For the electrical connection refer to status output
connection diagram.
converter.
Figure 4-14: Pulse frequency output passive Pp
Page 205 of 307

INFORMATION!
compartment.
Pulse and frequency output passive PN NAMUR, modular I/O

• Connection acc. to EN 60947-5-6
• open:
Inom = 0.6 mA
closed:
Inom = 3.8 mA
converter.
Figure 4-15: Pulse and frequency output passive PN acc. to NAMUR EN 60947-5-6
Page 206 of 307

Status output / limit switch active, modular I/Os

• Observe connection polarity.
• Uint = 24 VDC
• I ≤ 20 mA
• RL ≤ 47 kΩ
• open:
I ≤ 0.05 mA
closed:
U0, nom = 24 V at I = 20 mA
converter.
Figure 4-16: Status output / limit switch active Sa
Status output / limit switch passive, modular I/Os

• Uext = 32 VDC
• I ≤ 100 mA
• RL, max = 47 kΩ
• open:
closed:
U0, max = 0.2 V at I ≤ 10 mA
U0, max = 2 V at I ≤ 100 mA
converter.
Figure 4-17: Status output / limit switch passive Sp
Page 207 of 307

Status output / limit switch SN NAMUR, modular I/Os

• open:
Inom = 0.6 mA
closed:
Inom = 3.8 mA
converter.
Figure 4-18: Status output / limit switch SN acc. to NAMUR EN 60947-5-6
Page 208 of 307

CAUTION!
Control input active, modular I/Os

• Uint = 24 VDC
• External contact open:
U0, nom = 22 V
External contact closed:
Inom = 4 mA
Contact closed (on): U0 ≤ 10 V with Inom = 1.9 mA
Contact open (off): U0 ≥ 12 V with Inom = 1.9 mA
• X designates the connection terminals A or B, depending on the version of the signal
converter.
Figure 4-19: Control input active Ca

1 Signal
Control input passive, modular I/Os

• 3 V ≤ Uext ≤ 32 VDC
• Imax = 9.5 mA at Uext ≤ 24 V
Imax = 9.5 mA at Uext ≤ 32 V
Contact open (off): U0 ≤ 2.5 V with Inom = 1.9 mA
Contact closed (on): U0 ≥ 3 V with Inom = 1.9 mA
converter.
Figure 4-20: Control input passive Cp

1 Signal
Page 209 of 307

CAUTION!
Control input active CN NAMUR, modular I/Os

Contact open (off): U0, nom = 6.3 V with Inom < 1.9 mA
Contact closed (on): U0, nom = 6.3 V with Inom > 1.9 mA
• Detection of cable break:
U0 ≥ 8.1 V with I ≤ 0.1 mA
• Detection of cable short circuit:
U0 ≤ 1.2 V with I ≥ 6.7 mA
converter.
Figure 4-21: Control input active CN acc. to NAMUR EN 60947-5-6
Page 210 of 307

4.10.5 Ex i inputs/outputs
DANGER!
documentation.
INFORMATION!
For further information refer to Description of the inputs and outputs on page 32.
Current output active (only current output terminals C/C- have HART® capability), Ex i
I/Os
• Observe connection polarity.
• Uint, nom = 20 VDC
• I ≤ 22 mA
• RL ≤ 450 Ω
• X designates the connection terminals A or C, depending on the version of the signal
converter.
Figure 4-22: Current output active Ia Ex i
Current output passive (only current output terminals C/C- have HART® capability),
Ex i I/Os
• Uext ≤ 32 VDC
• I ≤ 22 mA
• U0 ≥ 4 V
• X designates the connection terminals A or C, depending on the version of the signal
converter.
Figure 4-23: Current output passive Ip Ex i
Page 211 of 307

DANGER!
documentation.
INFORMATION!
compartment.
Pulse and frequency output passive PN NAMUR, Ex i I/Os

• open:
Inom = 0.43 mA
closed:
Inom = 4.5 mA
• X designates the connection terminals B or D, depending on the version of the signal
converter.
Figure 4-24: Pulse/frequency output passive PN acc. to NAMUR EN 60947-5-6 Ex i
Page 212 of 307

INFORMATION!
Status output/limit switch SN NAMUR, Ex i I/Os

• open:
Inom = 0.43 mA
closed:
Inom = 4.5 mA
• The output is closed when the device is de-energised.
• X designates the connection terminals B or D, depending on the version of the signal
converter.
Figure 4-25: Status output / limit switch SN acc. to NAMUR EN 60947-5-6 Ex i
Page 213 of 307

DANGER!
documentation.
INFORMATION!
Control input passive, Ex i I/Os

• 5.5 V ≤ Uext ≤ 32 VDC
• Imax = 6 mA at Uext ≤ 24 V
Imax = 6.5 mA at Uext ≤ 32 V
Contact open (off): U0 ≤ 3.5 V with I ≤ 0.5 mA
Contact closed (on): U0 ≥ 5.5 V with I ≥ 4 mA
• X designates the connection terminals B, if available.
Figure 4-26: Control input passive Cp Ex i

1 Signal
Page 214 of 307

4.10.6 HART® connection

INFORMATION!
• In the basic I/O the current output at connection terminals A+/A-/A always has HART®
capability.
• For modular I/O and Ex i I/O, only the output module for the connection terminals C/C- has
HART® capability.
HART® connection active (point-to-point)
Figure 4-27: HART® connection active (Ia)

1 Basic I/O: terminals A and A+
2 Modular I/O: terminals C- and C
3 HART® communicator
The parallel resistance to the HART® communicator must be R ≥ 230 Ω.
Page 215 of 307

HART® connection passive (Multi-Drop mode)

• I: I0% ≥ 4 mA
• Multi-Drop mode I: Ifix ≥ 4 mA = I0%
• Uext ≤ 32 VDC
• R ≥ 230 Ω
Figure 4-28: HART® connection passive (Ip)

1 Basic I/O: terminals A- and A
2 Modular I/O: terminals C- and C
3 HART® communicator
4 Other devices with HART® capability
Page 216 of 307

MFC 400 START-UP 5
5.1 Switching on the power

Before connecting to power, please check that the system has been correctly installed.
This includes:
• The device must be mechanically safe and mounted in compliance with the regulations.
• The power connections must have been made in compliance with the regulations.
• The electrical terminal compartments must be secured and the covers have been screwed
on.
• Check that the electrical operating data of the power supply are correct.
• Switching on the power.
5.2 Starting the signal converter

The measuring device, consisting of the measuring sensor and the signal converter, is supplied
ready for operation. All operating data have been set at the factory in accordance with your order
specifications.
When the power is switched on, a self test is carried out. After that the device immediately
begins measuring, and the current values are displayed.
Figure 5-1: Displays in measuring mode (examples for 2 or 3 measured values)

x, y and z denote the units of the measured values displayed
It is possible to change between the two measured value windows, the trend display and the list
with the status messages by pressing the keys ↑ and ↓. For possible status messages, their
meaning and cause refer to Status messages and diagnostic information on page 104.
Page 217 of 307

6 OPERATION MFC 400
6.1 Display and operating elements
Figure 6-1: Display and operating elements (Example: flow indication with 2 measuring values)
1 Indicates a possible status message in the status list
2 Tag number (is only indicated if this number was entered previously by the operator)
3 Indicates when a key has been pressed
4 1st measured variable in large representation
5 Bargraph indication
6 Operating keys, optical and mechanical (see table below for function and representation in text)
7 Interface to the GDC bus (not present in all signal converter versions)
8 Infrared sensor (not present in all signal converter versions)
CAUTION!
The use of a jumper is only permitted for custody transfer devices to block access to parameters
relevant to custody transfer. When the jumper is set to or removed from the "protected" position,
the signal converter restarts to switch into the protected or unprotected operating mode.
INFORMATION!
• The switching point for the 4 optical keys is located directly in front of the glass. It is
recommended to activate the keys at right angles to the front. Touching them from the side
can cause incorrect operation.
• After 5 minutes of inactivity, there is an automatic return to measuring mode. Previously
changed data is not saved.
Page 218 of 307

MFC 400 OPERATION 6
Key Measuring mode Menu mode Submenu or function Parameter and data
mode mode
> Switch from measuring Access to displayed Access to displayed sub- For numerical values,
mode to menu mode; menu, then 1st menu or function move cursor
press key for 2.5 s, submenu is displayed (highlighted in blue) one
"quick start" menu is position to the right
then displayed
^ Reset display; "Quick Return to measuring Press 1 to 3 times, Return to submenu or
Access" function mode but prompt return to menu mode, function, data saved
whether the data should data saved
be saved
↓ or ↑ Switch between display Select menu Select submenu or Use cursor highlighted
pages: measured function in blue to change
value 1 + 2, trend page number, unit, property
and status page and to move the decimal
point
Esc (> + ↑) - - Return to menu mode Return to submenu or
without acceptance of function without
data acceptance of data
Page 219 of 307

6 OPERATION MFC 400
6.1.1 Display in measuring mode with 2 or 3 measured values
Figure 6-2: Example for display in measuring mode with 2 or 3 measured values
2 Tag number (is only indicated if this number was entered previously by the operator)
3 1st measured variable in large representation
4 Bargraph indication
5 Depiction with 3 measured values
6.1.2 Display for selection of submenu and functions, 3 lines
Figure 6-3: Display for selection of submenu and functions, 3 lines

2 Menu, submenu or function name
3 Number relating to 6
4 Indicates position within menu, submenu or function list
5 Next menu(s), submenu or function
(_ _ _ signalise in this line the end of the list)
6 Current menu(s), submenu or function
7 Previous menu(s), submenu or function
(_ _ _ signalise in this line the beginning of the list)
Page 220 of 307

MFC 400 OPERATION 6
6.1.3 Display when setting parameters, 4 lines
Figure 6-4: Display when setting parameters, 4 lines

3 Denotes factory setting
4 Denotes permissible value range
5 Permissible value range for numeric values
6 Currently set value, unit or function (when selected, appears with white text, blue background)
This is where the data is changed.
7 Current parameter
8 Factory setting of parameter
6.1.4 Display when previewing parameters, 4 lines
Figure 6-5: Display when previewing parameters, 4 lines

3 Denotes a changed parameter (simple check of changed data when browsing through lists)
4 Next parameter
5 Currently set data from 6
6 Current parameter (for selection press key >; then see previous chapter)
7 Factory setting of parameter
Page 221 of 307

6 OPERATION MFC 400
6.1.5 Using an IR interface (option)

The optical IR interface serves as an adapter for PC-based communication with the signal
converter without opening the housing.
INFORMATION!
• This device is not part of the scope of delivery.
• For more information about activation with the functions A6 or C6.6.7.
Figure 6-6: IR interface

1 Glass panel in front of the control and display panel
2 IR interface
3 LED lights up when IR interface is activated.
4 Suction cups
Timeout function
Following activation of the IR interface in Fct. A6 or C6.6.7 the interface must be properly
positioned and attached to the housing with the suction cups within 60 seconds. If this does not
happen within the specified time period, the device can be operated using the optical keys again.
Upon activation, the LED 3 lights up and the optical keys no longer function.
Page 222 of 307

MFC 400 OPERATION 6
6.2 Zero calibration (menu C1.1.1)

Following installation, perform zero calibration prior to commissioning the device. Finalise the
installation before performing zero calibration. Changes (pipe system or calibration factor) made
after the zero calibration may affect the accuracy, making it necessary to perform zero
calibration again.
Observe the following for reliable zero calibration:

• The measuring sensor should be completely filled with the product at the expected process
pressure and temperature.
• The product may contain no air or gas, especially when it comes to horizontal installations.
Prior to zero calibration, it is recommended that the product be flushed at a high flow rate
(>50%), for 2 minutes.
• After flushing, re-establish zero flow by closing off the corresponding valves.
Set zero calibration automatically or manually using the operating controls. The converter cover
must be installed on the display for automatic calibration.
A) Automatic calibration
Button Screen Description and setting
> A Quick Setup Press and hold for 2.5 s, then release the key.
2x↓ C Setup
3x> C1.1.1 Zero Calibration
> Calibrate zero?
Automatic
^ Please Wait
Countdown from 40 s
Calibrate zero
Passed
^ Zero Calibration Display of measured zero calibration in %.
+XX.XXX%
5x^ Save Configuration?
Yes
^ Display page
Page 223 of 307

6 OPERATION MFC 400
B) Manual calibration
Button Screen Description and setting
> A Quick Setup Press and hold for 2.5 s, then release the key.
2x↓ C Setup
3x> C1.1.1 Zero Calibration
> Calibrate zero?
Automatic
2x↓ Calibrate zero?
Manual
Zero Calibration Display currently stored zero calibration in %.
+XX.XXX% (Warning, value can be changed!)
Possible manual entry of zero calibration.
Storing the displayed zero calibration.
Yes
^ Display page
Zero calibration log (C1.1.5)

Zero calibrations are recorded in the zero calibration log. Log information includes zero offset,
temperature, date and time. Navigate using the ↑ and ↓ keys. Exit the menu using the ^ key.
Under certain conditions, zero calibration is not possible and will be cancelled:
• The product is still flowing. The shut-off valves are not closed tightly enough.
• There are still gas bubbles in the measuring sensor.
Remedy: Flush measuring sensor and repeat calibration
With some media, it may be difficult to perform zero calibration. In such cases, there are various
methods to still achieve good zero calibration:
Medium Possible solutions

Media that tend to evaporate or outgas Increase pressure.
Two-phase media (slurries), that contain solids that Only fill the measuring sensor with the carrier
may fall out. medium.
Two-phase media in which the solids or gas- Fill measuring sensor with another liquid, e.g.
forming components cannot be separated. water.
Page 224 of 307

MFC 400 OPERATION 6
6.3 Menu structure

INFORMATION!
Note the key function within and between the columns.
Measure mode Select ↓ Select menu and/or submenu Select

menu ↑ ↓↑ function
and set
data
↓↑>
^ Press
> 2.5 s
A Quick Setup > A1 Language >
^ ^
A2 Tag
A3 Reset > A3.1 Reset Errors
^
A3.2. All Totalisers
A3.3 Totaliser 1
A3.4 Totaliser 2
A3.5 Totaliser 3
A4 Analogue Outputs A4.1 Measurement
A4.2 Unit
A4.3 Range
A4.4 Low Flow Cutoff
A4.5 Time Constant
A5 Digital Outputs A5.1 Measurement
A5.2 Pulse Value Unit
A5.3 Value p. Pulse
A5.4 Low Flow Cutoff
A6 GDC IR interface
A7 Flow Direction
A8 Zero Calibration
A9 Operation Mode
↓↑ ↓↑ ↓↑ ↓↑>
Page 225 of 307

6 OPERATION MFC 400
Measuring mode Select ↓ Select menu and/or submenu Select

and set
data
↓↑>
^ Press
> 2.5 s
B Test > B1 Simulation > B1.1 Mass Flow >
^ ^ ^
B1.2 Volume Flow
B1.3 Density
B1.4 Temperature
B1._ Current Output X
B1._ Status Output X
B1._ Control Input X
B1._ Pulse Output X
B2 Actual Values > B2.1 Operating Hours
^
B2.2 Date and Time
B2.3 Mass Flow
B2.4 Volume Flow
B2.5 Velocity
B2.6 Density
B2.7 Temperature
B2.8 Strain 1
B2.9 Strain 2
B2.10 Tube Frequency
B2.11 Drive Level
B2.12 Sensor A Level
B2.13 Sensor B Level
2.14 2 Phase Signal
B2.15 SE PCB
Temperature
B2.16 Act. Operat. Mode
B3 Information > B3.1 Status Log
^
B3.2 Status Details
B3.3 C Number
B3.4 Sensor Electronics
B3.6 Electronic Revision
B3.7 Sensor Revision
B3.8 Change Log
↓↑ ↓↑ ↓↑ ↓↑>
Page 226 of 307

MFC 400 OPERATION 6
Measure mode Select ↓ Select menu and/or submenu Select

and set
data
↓↑>
^ Press
> 2.5 s
C Setup > C1 Process Input > C1.1 Zero and Offset >
^ ^ ^
C1.2 Density
C1.3 Filter
C1.4 System Control
C1.5 Diagnosis
C1.6 Information
C1.7 Flow Calibration
C1.8 Density Calib.
C1.9 Simulation
> C2 Concentration >
^ ^
^ > C3 I/O (Inputs/Outputs) > C3.1 Hardware >
^ ^ ^
C3._ Current Output X
C3._ Frequency Output X
C3._ Pulse Output X
C3._ Status Output X
C3._ Limit Switch X
C3._ Control Input X
^ > C4 I/O Totalisers > C4.1 Totaliser 1 >
^ ^ ^
C4.2 Totaliser 2
C4.3 Totaliser 3
^ > C5 I/O HART > C5.1 PV is >
^ ^ ^
C5.2 SV is
C5.3 TV is
C5.4 4V is
C5.5 HART Units
^ > C6 Device > C6.1 Device Info >
^ ^ ^
C6.2 Display
C6.3 1st Meas. Page
C6.4 2nd Meas. Page
C6.5 Graphic Page
C6.6 Special Functions
C6.7 Units
C6.8 HART
C6.9 Quick Setup
↓↑ ↓↑ ↓↑ ↓↑>
Page 227 of 307

6 OPERATION MFC 400
6.4 Function tables

INFORMATION!
• The following tables describe the functions of the standard device with HART® connection.
The functions for Modbus, Foundation Fieldbus and Profibus are described in detail in the
corresponding supplementary instructions.
• Depending on the device version, not all functions are available.
6.4.1 Menu A, Quick Setup
No. Function Setting / Description
A1 Language
A1 Language Language selection depends on the device version.
A2 Tag
A2 Tag Measuring point identifier (Tag no.) (also for HART® operation) appears in
the LCD header (max. 8 digits).
A3 Reset
A3 Reset
A3.1 Reset Errors Reset Errors? Select: No / Yes
A3.2 All Totalisers Reset Totaliser? Select: No / Yes (available if activated in C6.9.4)
A3.3 Totaliser 1 Reset Totaliser? Select: No / Yes (available if activated in C6.9.1)
A4 Analogue Outputs (only for HART®)

A4 Analogue Outputs Applicable to all current outputs (terminals A, B and C), frequency outputs
(terminals A, B and D), limit switch (terminals A, B, C, and / or D) and the 1st
display page / line 1.
A4.1 Measurement Select:
Volume Flow / Mass Flow / Temperature / Density / Velocity / Sensor
Average / Sensor Deviation / Drive Level / Tube Frequency / Strain 1 /
Strain 2 / 2 Phase Signal
Depending on the settings for the concentration measurement, the following

measurements are possible:
Concentration 1 / Concentration 2 / Conc. mass flow 1 / Conc. mass flow 2 /
Conc. volume flow 1 / Conc. volume flow 2
Use for all outputs? (also use this setting for Fct. A4.2...A4.5!)
Setting: No (applies only to the main current output ) / Yes (applies to all
analogue outputs)
A4.2 Unit Selection of the unit from a list, depending on the "measurement"
A4.3 Range Setting for main current output (range: 0...100%)
Setting: 0…x.xx (format and unit, depending on measurement, see A4.1 and
A4.2 above)
Use for all outputs? Make setting, see Fct. A4.1 above!
A4.4 Low Flow Cutoff 1) Setting for main current output (sets output value to "0")
Setting: x.xxx ± x.xxx% (range: 0.0…20%)
(1st value = switching point / 2nd value = hysteresis),
condition: 2nd value ≤ 1st value
2) Use for all outputs? Make setting, see Fct. A4.1 above!
Page 228 of 307

MFC 400 OPERATION 6

A4.5 Time Constant 1) Setting for main current output (applicable to all flow measurements)
Setting: xxx.x s (range: 000.1…100 s)
A4 Station Address
A4 Station Address For Profibus / FF / Modbus devices.
A5 Digital Outputs
A5 Digital Outputs Valid for all pulse outputs (terminals A, B and/or D) and totaliser 1.
A5.1 Measurement 1) Select: Volume Flow / Mass Flow / Concentration Flow 1
2) Use for all outputs? (also use this setting for Fct. A5.2...A5.4!)
Setting: No (only for pulse output D) / Yes (for all digital outputs)
A5.2 Pulse Value Unit Selection of the unit from a list, depending on the "measurement"
A5.3 Value Per Pulse 1) Setting for pulse output D (volume or mass value per pulse)
Setting: xxx.xxx in l/s or kg/s
A5.4 Low Flow Cutoff 1) Setting for pulse output D (sets output value to "0")
Setting: x.xxx ± x.xxx% (range: 0.0…20%)
A6 GDC IR interface
A6 GDC IR Interface After this function has been activated an optical GDC adapter can be
connected to the LC display. After 60 seconds pass without a connection
being established or after the adapter is removed, the function is exited and
the optical keys are active again.
Break (exit function without connection)
Activate (the IR interface adapter and interrupt the optical keys)
A7 Flow Direction
A7 Flow Direction Forwards (according to the arrow on the measuring sensor) or backwards
(in the opposite direction to the arrow)
A8 Zero Calibration
A8 Zero Calibration Zero calibration; calibration sequence as described in Fct. C1.1.1...1.1.4
A9 Operation Mode
A9 Operation Mode Set the operating mode.
Setting: Measure / Stop / Standby
For detailed information refer to Operation Mode (menu A9) on page 89.
Page 229 of 307

6 OPERATION MFC 400
6.4.2 Menu B, test
B1 Simulation
B1 Simulation Displayed values are simulated.
B1.1 Mass Flow Simulation of mass flow
Set value (range and units depend on measurement)
Break (exit function without simulation)
Query: start simulation?
Settings: Yes (start simulation) / No (exit function without simulation)
B1.2 Volume Flow Sequence and settings similar to B1.1, see above!
[X stands for one of the connection terminals A, B, C or D]
B1.3 Density _ stands for Fct. B1.4...1.7
B1.4 Temperature
B1._ Current Output X Simulation X
[X stands for one of the connection terminals A, B, C or D]
B1._ Pulse Output X Sequence and settings similar to B1.1, see above!
B1._ Frequency Output X For the pulse output the set number of pulses are displayed once in a
second!
B1._ Control Input X
B1._ Limit Switch X
B1._ Status Output X
B2 Actual Values
B2 Actual Values Display of actual values;
Exit the displayed function with the ^ key.
B2.1 Operating Hours Device operating hours
B2.2 Date and Time Date and time of real time clock
B2.3 Mass Flow Current unfiltered mass flow
B2.4 Volume Flow Current unfiltered volume flow
B2.5 Velocity Current unfiltered velocity
B2.6 Density Current unfiltered density
B2.7 Temperature Current unfiltered temperature
B2.8 Strain 1 Current value for the first strain
B2.9 Strain 2 Current value for the second strain
B2.10 Tube Frequency Current vibration frequency of the measuring tube
B2.11 Drive Level Current drive level to activate vibration
B2.12 Sensor A Level Current vibration amplitude
B2.13 Sensor B Level
B2.14 2 Phase Signal 2 phase indicator value
B2.15 SE PCB Temperature Temperature of measuring sensor electronics
B2.16 Act. Operat. Mode Current operation mode
Page 230 of 307

MFC 400 OPERATION 6
B3 Information
B3 Information
B3.1 Status Log Log with date and time of status messages that occurred
B3.2 Status Details Details about the status messages displayed
B3.3 C Number CG number, cannot be changed (input/output version)
B3.4 Sensor Electronics Displays the version of the measuring sensor electronics
B3.5 "Bus interface" Only appears with Profibus, Modbus and FF
B3.6 Electronic Revision Displays the version of the signal converter. Includes all hardware and
software changes.
B3.7 Sensor Revision Revision of measuring sensor
B3.8 Change Log The check sum across all settings is displayed directly below the menu item.
Shows the changes including date, time and check sum for all settings and
parameters in the converter, regardless of the interface (display, HART®,
PROFIBUS, ...) used.
6.4.3 Menu C, Setup
No. Function Settings / descriptions
C1 Process Input
C1.1 Zero and Offset

C1.1 Zero and Offset -
C1.1.1 Zero Calibration Start zero calibration
Query: calibrate zero?
Setting:
Automatic / Factory Settings /
Manual (display last value; set new value, range: -10…+10%) /
Break (return with ^ key)
C1.1.2 Zero Add. Offset Direct setting of zero offset
C1.1.3 Pipe Diameter Set the pipe diameter in mm to calculate flow velocity
C1.1.4 Flow Correction Defines additional correction for mass flow;
Range: -100...+100%
C1.1.5 Zero Calibration Log Log of last zero calibration including zero point, temperature, date and time
C1.2 Density
C1.2.1 Density Calib. Start density calibration
For detailed information refer to Density calibration (menu C1.2.1) on page
90.
C1.2.2 Density Mode Sel. Selection of density mode:
Process (return with ^ key) /
Fixed (a fixed value is used for the density (e.g. standard density)) /
Referred (calculates process density based on a reference temperature) /
Standard (calculates standard density based on a reference temperature
and the correction factors)
C1.2.3 Fixed Density Value Set the fixed value (e.g. standard density) for the density.
Appears only if density mode "Fixed" has been selected in Fct. C1.2.2.
C1.2.3 Density Ref. Temp. Set the reference temperature for the reference density option
Appears only if density mode "Referred" has been selected in Fct. C1.2.2.
Page 231 of 307

6 OPERATION MFC 400

C1.2.4 Ref. Density Slope Set the slope for the reference density option
Appears only if density mode "Referred" has been selected in Fct. C1.2.2.
C1.2.5 Standard Density Temp. Appears only if density mode "Standard" has been selected in Fct. C1.2.2.
Density reference temperature to calculate standard density
C1.2.6 Standard Density k0 Appears only if density mode "Standard" has been selected in Fct. C1.2.2.
Coefficient k0 to calculate standard density
C1.2.9 Last Density Cal. Date of last density calibration
C1.3 Filter
C1.3 Filter -
C1.3.1 Flow Direction Define polarity of flow direction.
Forwards (according to the arrow on the measuring sensor) or backwards
(in the opposite direction to the arrow)
C1.3.2 Press. Supp. Time Set the pressure suppression time; range: 0.0...20.0 s
C1.3.3 Press. Supp. Cutoff Low flow cutoff settings for the pressure suppression; range: 0.0...10.0%
C1.3.4 Low Flow Cutoff Set the low flow cutoff; range: 00.0...10.0%
C1.4 System Control

C1.4 System Control -
C1.4.1 Function Set the system control.
Select: Inactive (off) / Flow = 0 (flow to zero)
C1.4.2 Sys. Ctrl. Condition Set the condition for activating the system control.
Selection: density or temperature
C1.4.3 Sys. Ctrl. Max Limit Defines the upper limit for the condition selected in C1.4.2
C1.4.4 Sys. Ctrl. Min Limit Defines the lower limit for the condition selected in C1.4.2
C1.5 Diagnosis
C1.5 Diagnosis -
C1.5.1 Max. Rec. Temp. Display of maximum recorded sensor temperature
C1.5.2 Min. Rec. Temp. Display of minimum recorded sensor temperature
C1.5.3 2 Ph. Threshold Defines the process-dependent sensitivity for 2 phase signal error message.
C1.5.4 & C1.5.5 & C1.4.6 Function
C1.5.4 Diagnosis 1 Defines the parameter for the respective diagnosis value.
Select:
C1.5.5 Diagnosis 2 Off (goes to zero) / Sensor Average (sensor amplitude A+B) / Sensor
C1.5.6 Diagnosis 3 Deviation / Drive Level / MT Frequency / Strain 1 / Strain 2 /
2 Phase Signal
C1.5.7 Proc: Signal Low Selection of status signal (Failure, Out of Specification, Function Check,
Maintenance Required and Information) for the group "Proc: Signal Low"
C1.5.8 Proc: Signal Search Selection of status signal (Failure, Out of Specification, Function Check,
Maintenance Required and Information) for the group "Proc: Signal Search"
C1.5.9 Proc: Current Input Selection of status signal (Failure, Out of Specification, Function Check,
Maintenance Required and Information) for the group "Proc: Current Input"
C1.5.10 Proc: 2 Phase Flow Selection of status signal (Failure, Out of Specification, Function Check,
Maintenance Required and Information) for the group "Proc: 2 Phase Flow"
Page 232 of 307

MFC 400 OPERATION 6

C1.5.11 Proc: System Control Selection of status signal (Failure, Out of Specification, Function Check,
Maintenance Required and Information) for the group "Proc: System
Control"
C1.5.12 Config: Totaliser Selection of status signal (Failure, Out of Specification, Function Check,
Maintenance Required and Information) for the group "Config: Totaliser"
C1.5.13 Electr: Power Failure Selection of status signal (Failure, Out of Specification, Function Check,
Maintenance Required and Information) for the group "Electr: Power
Failure"
C1.5.14 Electr: IO Connection Selection of status signal (Failure, Out of Specification, Function Check,
Maintenance Required and Information) for the group "Electr: IO
Connection"
C1.6 Information
C1.6 Information -
C1.6.1 Sensor Name Name of measuring sensor
C1.6.2 Sensor ID ID of measuring sensor
C1.6.3 Nominal Mass Flow Nominal mass flow of measuring sensor
C1.6.4 Max. Allowed Temp. Displays the maximum permitted temperature for the measuring sensor
C1.6.5 Min. Allowed Temp. Displays the minimum permitted temperature for the measuring sensor
C1.6.6 Calibration Date Date of factory calibration
C1.6.7 V No. Sensor V number of the measuring sensor
C1.6.8 Serial No. Sensor Serial number of the measuring sensor
C1.6.9 V No. Converter V number of the signal converter
C1.6.10 Sensor Electronics Displays the version of the measuring sensor electronics
C1.7 Flow Calibration

C1.7 Flow Calibration -
C1.7.1... CF1...CF27 Displays the measuring sensor calibration coefficients (not CF9 or CF10) for
1.7.25 the flow measurement
C1.8 Density Calib.

C1.8 Density Calib. -
C1.8.1... DCF1...DCF8 Displays the measuring sensor calibration coefficients for density
1.8.8 measurement
C1.9 Simulation
C1.9 Simulation -
C1.9.1 Mass Flow As in B1.1
C1.9.2 Volume Flow As in B1.2
C1.9.3 Density As in B1.3
C1.9.4 Temperature As in B1.4
Page 233 of 307

6 OPERATION MFC 400
C2 Concentration
C2 Concentration See supplementary concentration manual
C3 I/O (Inputs/Outputs)
C3.1 Hardware
C3.1 Hardware Configuration of connection terminals.
Selection depends on signal converter version.
C3.1.1 Terminal A Select:
Off (switched off) / Current Output / Frequency Output / Pulse Output / Status
Output / Limit Switch / Control Input
C3.1.2 Terminal B Select:
Off (switched off) / Current Output / Frequency Output / Pulse Output / Status
Output / Limit Switch / Control Input
C3.1.3 Terminal C Select:
Off (switched off) / Current Output / Status Output / Limit Switch
C3.1.4 Terminal D Select:
Off (switched off) / Frequency Output / Pulse Output / Status Output / Limit
Switch
C3._ Current Output X

C3._ Current Output X X stands for one of the connection terminals A, B or C
_ stands for Fct. C3.2 (A) / C3.3 (B) / C3.4 (C)
C3._.1 Range 0%…100% HART® current output: 4…20 mA
Current range for the selected measurement, e.g. 4...20 mA,
corresponds to 0…100%
Note: with a 0...20 mA current output, "HART" in Fct. C6.8.1 must be
switched off!
xx.x … xx.x mA; range: 0.00…20 mA
(condition: 0 mA ≤ 1st value ≤ 2nd value ≤ 20 mA)
C3._.2 Extended Range Min. and max. limits of current values. If the current range is exceeded, the
current is set to these limits.
xx.x … xx.x mA; range: 03.5…21.5 mA
(Condition: 0 mA ≤ 1st value ≤ 2nd value ≤ 21.5 mA and out of current range)
C3._.3 Error Current Specify error current (default setting: 3.6 mA)
xx.x mA; range: 3…22 mA (condition: outside of extended range)
C3._.4 Error Condition The following error conditions can be selected:
Select:
Failure / Maintenance Required / Out Of Specification (error category [S])
C3._.5 Measurement Measurements for activating the output
Select:

C3._.6 Range 0…100% of the measurement set in Fct. C3._.5
x.xx…xx.xx _ _ _ (format and unit depend on the "measurement", see above)
Page 234 of 307

MFC 400 OPERATION 6

C3._.7 Polarity Set polarity; the flow direction in C1.3.2 must be noted!
Select:
Both Polarities (plus and minus values are displayed) /
Positive Polarity (display for negative values = 0) /
Negative Polarity (display for positive values = 0) /
Absolute Value (always displays positive, with both negative and positive
values)
C3._.8 Limitation Limitation before applying the time constant
±xxx … ±xxx%; range: -150…+150%
C3._.9 Low Flow Cutoff Sets the measurement to "0" for low values
x.xxx ± x.xxx%; range: 0.0…20%
C3._.10 Time Constant Range: 000.1…100 s
C3._.11 Special Function Automatic Range;
Select:
Off (switched off) /
Automatic Range (range is changed automatically, extended lower range,
only makes sense in combination with a status output) /
External Range (change by control input, extended lower range; control
input must also be activated)
C3._.12 Threshold Appears only when Fct. C3._.11 "Threshold" is activated between extended
and normal range. The automatic range function always changes from the
extended to the normal range when the 100% current is reached.
The upper 100% value of the hysteresis is then = 0. The threshold is then the
hysteresis value, instead of "Threshold ± Hysteresis" as shown in the
display.
Range: 5.0…80%
C3._.13 Information Serial no. of the I/O board, software version no. and production date of the
circuit board
C3._.14 Simulation Sequence see B1._ current output X
C3._.15 4mA Trimming Trimming of the current at 4 mA
Reset to 4 mA restores the factory calibration.
Used for HART® setting.
C3._.16 20mA Trimming Trimming of the current at 20 mA
Reset to 20 mA restores the factory calibration.
Used for HART® setting.
Page 235 of 307

6 OPERATION MFC 400
C3._ Frequency Output X

C3._ Frequency Output X X stands for one of the connection terminals A, B or D
_ stands for Fct. C3.2 (A) / C3.3 (B) / C3.5 (D)
C3._.1 Pulse Shape Specify the pulse shape
Select:
Symmetric (about 50% on and 50% off) /
Automatic (constant pulse with about 50% on and 50% off at 100% pulse
rate) /
Fixed (fixed pulse rate, setting see below Fct. C3._.3 100% pulse rate)
C3._.2 Pulse Width Only available if set to "Fixed" in Fct. C3._.1.
Range: 0.05…2000 ms
Note: max. setting value Tp [ms] ≤ 500 / max. pulse rate [1/s], gives the pulse
width = time where the output is activated
C3._.3 100% Pulse Rate Pulse rate for 100% of the measuring range
Range: 1…10000 Hz
Limitation 100% pulse rate ≤ 100/s: Imax ≤ 100 mA
Limitation 100% pulse rate > 100/s: Imax ≤ 20 mA
Select:

x.xx…xx.xx _ _ _ (format and unit depend on the "measurement", see above)
Select:
values)
±xxx … ±xxx%; range: -150…+150%
C3._.10 Invert Signal Select:
Off (activated output: switch closed) /
On (activated output: switch open)
C3._.11 Phase Shift w.r.t. B Only available when configuring the terminal A or D and only if output B is a
pulse or frequency output. If setting in Fct. C3._.6 is "Both Polarities", the
phase shift is prefixed by a symbol, e.g. -90° and +90°
Select:
Off (no phase shift) /
0° Phase Shift (between outputs A or D and B, inversion possible) /
180° Phase Shift (between outputs A or D and B, inversion possible)
Page 236 of 307

MFC 400 OPERATION 6
C3.3.11 Special Functions This function is only available at the terminal B frequency output. At the
same time, 2 frequency outputs must be available:
1st output at terminal A or D / 2nd output at terminal B
The B output is operated as a slave output, controlled and set using master
output A or D
Select:
Phase Shift w.r.t. D or A (slave output is B and master output is D or A)
circuit board
C3._.13 Simulation Sequence see B1._ Frequency Output X
C3._ Pulse Output X

C3._ Pulse Output X X stands for one of the connection terminals A, B or D
_ stands for Fct. C3.2 (A) / C3.3 (B) / C3.5 (D)
C3._.1 Pulse Shape Specify the pulse shape
Select:
Symmetric (about 50% on and 50% off) /
Automatic (constant pulse with about 50% on and 50% off at 100% pulse
rate) /
Fixed (fixed pulse rate, setting see below Fct. C3._.3 100% pulse rate)
C3._.2 Pulse Width Only available if set to "Fixed" in Fct. C3._.1.
Range: 0.05…2000 ms
Note: max. setting value Tp [ms] ≤ 500 / max. pulse rate [1/s], gives the pulse
width = time where the output is activated
C3._.3 Max. Pulse Rate Pulse rate for 100% of the measuring range
Range: 0.0…10000 1/s
Limitation 100% pulse rate ≤ 100/s: Imax ≤ 100 mA
Limitation 100% pulse rate > 100/s: Imax ≤ 20 mA
Select: Volume Flow / Mass Flow
C3._.5 Pulse Value Unit Selection of the unit from a list, depending on the "measurement"
C3._.6 Value Per Pulse Set value for volume or mass per pulse
xxx.xxx, measured value in unit depending on setting in C3._.5
At max. pulse rate see above 3._.3 "Pulse Output"
Select:
values)
Page 237 of 307

6 OPERATION MFC 400
C3._.11 Phase Shift w.r.t. B Only available when configuring the terminal A or D and only if output B is a
pulse or frequency output. If setting in Fct. C3._.7 is "Both Polarities", the
phase shift is prefixed by a symbol, e.g. -90° and +90°
Select:
180° Phase Shift (between outputs A or D and B, inversion possible)
C3.3.11 Special Functions This function is only available at the pulse output of terminal B. At the same
time, 2 pulse outputs must be available:
1st output at terminal A or D / 2nd output at terminal B
The B output is operated as a slave output, controlled and set using master
output A or D
Select:
Phase Shift w.r.t. D or A (slave output is B and master output is D or A)
circuit board
C3._.13 Simulation Sequence see B1._ Pulse Output X
Page 238 of 307

MFC 400 OPERATION 6
C3._ Status Output X

C3._ Status Output X X (Y) stands for one of the connection terminals A, B, C or D
_ stands for Fct. C3.2 (A) / C3.3 (B) / C3.4 (C) / C3.5 (D)
C3._.1 Mode The output shows the following measuring conditions:
Failure (output set, signals status of the category "Failure" refer to Status
messages and diagnostic information on page 104) /
Out Of Specification (output set, signals status of category "Failure" or
"Maintenance Required" or "Out Of Specification" refer to Status messages
and diagnostic information on page 104) /
Maintenance Required (output set, signals status of category "Failure" or
"Maintenance Required" refer to Status messages and diagnostic
information on page 104) /
Flow Polarity (polarity of the current flow) /
Flow Over Range (over range of the flow)
Totaliser 1 Preset (activates when totaliser X preset value is reached) /
Output A (activated by the status of output Y, additional output data see
below) /
Output B (activated by the status of output Y, additional output data see
below) /
Output C (activated by the status of output Y, additional output data see
below) /
Output D (activated by the status of output Y, additional output data see
below) /
Off (switched off)
C3._.2 Current Output Y Only appears if output A...C is set under "Mode" (see above), and this output
is a "Current Output".
Polarity (is signalled)
Over Range (is signalled)
Automatic Range signals lower range
C3._.2 Frequency Output Y and Only appears if output A, B or D is set under "Mode" (see above), and this
Pulse Output Y output is a "Frequency/Pulse Output".
Polarity (is signalled)
Over Range (is signalled)
C3._.2 Status Output Y Only appears if output A...D is set under "Mode" (see above), and this output
is a "Status Output".
Same Signal (like other connected status output, signal can be inverted, see
below)
C3._.2 Limit Switch Y and Control Only appears if output A...D / input A or B is set under "Mode" (see above),
Input Y and this output / input is a "Limit Switch / Control Input".
Status Off (is always selected here if Status Output X is connected with a
Limit Switch / Control Input Y).
C3._.2 Output Y Only appears if output A...D is set under "Mode" (see above) and this output
is switched off.
circuit board
C3._.5 Simulation Sequence see B1._ Status Output X
Page 239 of 307

6 OPERATION MFC 400
C3._ Limit Switch X

C3._ Limit Switch X X stands for one of the connection terminals A, B, C or D
_ stands for Fct. C3.2 (A) / C3.3 (B) / C3.4 (C) / C3.5 (D)
C3._.1 Measurement Select:
C3._.2 Threshold Switching level, set threshold with hysteresis
xxx.x ±x.xxx (format and unit depend on the measurement, see above)
(1st value = threshold / 2nd value = hysteresis),
Select:
values)
circuit board
C3._.7 Simulation Sequence see B1._ Limit Switch X

C3._.1 Mode X stands for connection terminal A or B
_ stands for Fct. C3.2 (A) / C3.3 (B)
Off (control input switched off) /
Hold All Outputs (hold actual values, not display and totalisers) /
Hold Output Y (hold actual values) /
All Outputs To Zero (actual values = 0%, not display and totalisers) /
Output Y To Zero (actual value = 0%) /
All Totalisers (reset all totalisers to "0") /
Totaliser "Z" Reset (set totaliser 1, 2 or 3 to "0") /
Stop All Totalisers /
Stop Totaliser "Z" (stops totaliser 1, 2 or 3) /
Zero Outp.+Stop Tot. (all outputs 0%, stop all totalisers, not the display) /
External Range Y (control input for external range of current output Y) - also
make this setting on current output Y (no check if current output Y is
available) /
Error Reset (all resettable errors are deleted) /
Calibrate zero
circuit board
C3._.4 Simulation Sequence see B1._ Control Input X
Page 240 of 307

MFC 400 OPERATION 6
C4 I/O Totalisers
C4.1 Totaliser 1 Set function of counter.
_ stands for 1, 2, 3 (= Totaliser 1, 2, 3)
C4.2 Totaliser 2 The basic version (standard) has only 2 totaliser!
C4.3 Totaliser 3
C4._.1 Totaliser Function Select:
Absolute Total (counts positive + negative values) /
Incremental Total (counts only the positive values) /
Decremental Total (counts only the negative values) /
Off (Totaliser is switched off)
C4._.2 Measurement Selection of the measurement for Totaliser _
Select:
Volume Flow / Mass Flow /
(depends on the settings for the concentration measurement):
Conc. mass flow 1 / Conc. mass flow 2 / Conc. volume flow 1 / Conc. volume
flow 2
Range: 0.0…20%
C4._.5 Preset Value If this value is reached, positive or negative, a signal is generated that can be
used for a status output at which "Preset Totaliser X" has to be set.
Preset Value (max. 8 digits) x.xxxxx in selected unit, see C6.7.10 + 13
C4._.6 Reset Totaliser Sequence see Fct. A3.3, A3.4 and A3.5
C4._.7 Set Totaliser Set Totaliser _ to the desired value
Select:
Break (exit function) / Set Value (opens the editor to make the entry)
Query: Set Totaliser?
Select:
Select: No (exit function without setting the value) / Yes (sets the totaliser
and exits the function)
C4._.8 Stop Totaliser Totaliser _ is stopped and holds the actual value
Select:
No (exit the function without stopping the totaliser) / Yes (stop the totaliser
and exit the function)
C4._.9 Start Totaliser Start Totaliser _ after that totaliser is stopped
Select:
No (exits the function without starting the totaliser) / Yes (starts the totaliser
and exits the function)
circuit board
Page 241 of 307

6 OPERATION MFC 400
C5 I/O HART
C5 I/O HART Selection or display of the 4 dynamic variables (DV) for HART®
The HART® current output (terminal A basic I/Os or terminal C modular I/Os)
always has a fixed link to the primary variables (PV). Fixed links of the other
DVs (1-3) are only possible if additional analogue outputs (current and
frequency output) are available. If not, the measured value can be freely
selected from the values in the list in Fct. A4.1 "Measurement".
_ stands for 1, 2, 3 or 4
X stands for connection terminals A...D

C5.1 PV is Current output (primary variable)
C5.2 SV is (secondary variable)
C5.3 TV is (tertiary variable)
C5.4 4V is (4th variable)
C5.5 HART Units Changes units of DVs (dynamic variables) in the display
Break: return with ^ key
HART® display: copies the settings for the display units to the settings for
DVs
Standard: factory settings for DVs
C5._.1 Current Output X Shows the current analogue measured value of the linked current output.
The "measurement" cannot be changed!
C5._.1 Frequency Output X Shows the current analogue measured value of the linked frequency output,
if present. The "measurement" cannot be changed!
C5._.1 HART Dynamic Var. Measurements of the dynamic variables for HART®.
Select:
Volume Flow / Mass Flow / Diagnosis Value / Flow Velocity /
Totaliser 1 / Totaliser 2 / Totaliser 3 / Operating Hours
Page 242 of 307

MFC 400 OPERATION 6
C6 Device
C6.1 Device Info

C6.1 Device Info -
C6.1.1 Tag Settable characters (max. 8 digits):
A…Z; a…z; 0…9; / - + , .
C6.1.2 V No. Sensor V number of the measuring sensor, cannot be changed
C6.1.3 Serial No. Sensor Serial no. of the measuring sensor, cannot be changed
C6.1.4 Sensor Revision Revision of the measuring sensor, cannot be changed
C6.1.5 V No. Converter V number of the signal converter, cannot be changed
C6.1.6 Converter Serial No. Serial no. of the signal converter, cannot be changed
C6.1.7 C Number CG number, cannot be changed; describes the signal converter version
C6.1.8 Electronics Serial No. Serial no. of the electronic assembly, cannot be changed
C6.1.9 Electronic Revision Displays the version of the signal converter. Includes all hardware and
software changes.
C6.2 Display
C6.2 Display -
C6.2.1 Language Language selection depends on the device version.
C6.2.2 Contrast Adjust display contrast for extreme temperatures.
Setting: -9…0…+9
This change takes place immediately, not just when setting mode is exited!
C6.2.3 Default Display Specification of the default display page that is returned to after a short
delay period.
Select:
None (the current page is always active) / 1st Meas. Page (show this page) /
2nd Meas. Page (show this page) / Status Page (show only status
messages) / Graphic Page (trend display of the 1st measurement)
C6.2.4 Optical Keys Activate or deactivate the optical keys
Select: On / Off
C6.3 & C6.4 1st Meas. Page & 2nd Meas. Page
C6.3 1st Meas. Page _ stands for 3 = 1st Meas. Page and 4 = 2nd Meas. Page
C6.4 2nd Meas. Page
C6._.1 Function Specify number of measured value lines (font size)
Select:
One Line / Two Lines / Three Lines
C6._.2 1st Line Variable Specify measurement for 1st line
Select:

x.xx…xx.xx _ _ _ (format and unit depend on the "measurement")
Page 243 of 307

6 OPERATION MFC 400

±xxx ... ±xxx%; range: -150…+150%
C6._.5 Low Flow Cutoff Sets low flow values to "0"
x.xxx ± x.xxx %; Range: 0.0…20 %
C6._.7 1st Line Format Specify decimal places
Select:
Automatic (adaptation is carried out automatically) /
X°(=°none)°…X.XXXXXXXX°(max.°8°digits) depends on size of font
C6._.8 2nd Line Variable Specify 2nd Line Variable (only available if this 2nd line is activated)
Select:
Bargraph (for the "measurement" selected in the 1st line) / Volume Flow /
Mass Flow / Temperature / Density / Velocity / Sensor Average / Sensor
Deviation / Drive Level / Tube Frequency / Strain 1 / Strain 2 / 2 Phase
Signal / Totaliser 1 / Totaliser 2 / Totaliser 3 / Operating Hours

C6._.9 2nd Line Format Specify decimal places
Select:
C6._.10 3rd Line Variable Specify 3rd Line Variable (only available if this 3rd line is activated)
Select:
Strain 2 / 2 Phase Signal / Totaliser 1 / Totaliser 2 / Totaliser 3 / Operating
Hours

C6._.11 3rd Line Format Specify decimal places
Select:
C6.5 Graphic Page

C6.5 Graphic Page -
C6.5.1 Select Range Graphic page always shows trend curve of the measurement of the 1st
page / 1st line, see Fct. C6.3.2
Select:
Manual (set range in Fct. C6.5.2) /
Automatic (automatic depiction based on the measured values)
Reset only after parameter change or after switching off and on.
C6.5.2 Range Set the scaling for the Y axis. Only available if "Manual" is set in C6.5.1.
±xxx ±xxx%; range: -100…+100%
(1st value = lower limit / 2nd value = upper limit),
condition: 1st value ≤ 2nd value
Page 244 of 307

MFC 400 OPERATION 6

C6.5.3 Time Scale Set the time scaling for the X axis, trend curve
xxx min; range: 0…100 min
C6.6 Special Functions

C6.6 Special Functions -
C6.6.1 Reset Errors Reset Errors?
Select: No / Yes
C6.6.2 Save Settings Save current settings
Select:
Break (exit function without saving) / Backup 1 (save in storage location 1) /
Backup 2 (save in storage location 2)
Query: Continue To Copy? (cannot be undone)
Select:
No (exit function without saving) / Yes (copy current settings to storage
backup 1 or backup 2)
C6.6.3 Load Settings Load saved settings
Select:
Break (exit function without loading) / Factory Settings (restore factory
settings) / Backup 1 (load data from storage location 1) / Backup 2 (load data
from storage location 2)
Query: Continue To Copy? (cannot be undone)
Select:
No (exit the function without saving) / Yes (load data from the selected
storage location)
C6.6.4 Password Quick Set Password required to change data in the menu "Quick Setup"
0000 (= to menu "Quick Setup" without password)
xxxx (password required); range 4 digits: 0001…9999
C6.6.5 Password Setup Password required to change data in the menu "Setup"
0000 (= to menu "Quick Setup" without password)
xxxx (password required); range 4 digits: 0001…9999
C6.6.6 Date and Time Set real time clock
C6.6.7 Quick Access Set "Quick Access" function;
Select:
Off (deactivated) / Reset Totaliser 1, 2, 3 or All Totalisers
C6.6.8 GDC IR Interface After this function has been activated an optical GDC adapter can be
connected to the LC display. After 60 seconds pass without a connection
being established or after the adapter is removed, the function is exited and
the optical keys are active again.
Select:
Break (exit function without connection) /
Activate (the IR interface adapter and interrupt the optical keys)
After 60 seconds pass without a connection being established, the function is
exited and the optical keys are active again.
C6.7 Units
C6.7 Units
C6.7.1 Volume Flow m³/h; m³/min; m³/s; L/h; L/min; L/s (L = litres); IG/s; IG/min; IG/h
cf/h; cf/min; cf/s; gal/h; gal/min; gal/s; barrel/h; barrel/day
Free Unit (set factor and text in the next two functions, sequence see below)
C6.7.2 Text Free Unit For text to be specified refer to Set free units on page 87:
C6.7.3 [m³/s]*Factor Specification of the conversion factor, based on m³/s:
xxx.xxx refer to Set free units on page 87
Page 245 of 307

6 OPERATION MFC 400

C6.7.4 Mass Flow kg/s; kg/min; kg/h; t/min; t/h; g/s; g/min; g/h;
lb/s; lb/min; lb/h; ST/min; ST/h (ST = Short Ton); LT/h (LT = Long Ton);
C6.7.6 [kg/s]*Factor Specification of the conversion factor, based on kg/s:
C6.7.7 Velocity m/s; ft/s
C6.7.9 Temperature °C; °F; K
C6.7.10 Volume m³; L; hL; mL; gal; IG; in³; cf; yd³; barrel
C6.7.12 [m³]*Factor Specification of the conversion factor, based on m³:
C6.7.13 Mass kg; t; mg; g; lb; ST; LT; oz;
C6.7.15 [kg]*Factor Specification of the conversion factor, based on kg:
C6.7.16 Density kg/L; kg/m³; lb/cf; lb/gal; SG
C6.7.18 [kg/m³]*Factor Specification of the conversion factor, based on kg/m³:
C6.7.19 Pressure Pa; kPa; bar; mbar; psi (no free units possible);
only if current input available
Page 246 of 307

MFC 400 OPERATION 6
C6.8 HART
C6.8 HART
C6.8.1 HART Switch HART® communication on/off:
Select:
On (HART® activated) possible current range for current output 4…20 mA /
Off (HART® not activated) possible current range for current output
0…20 mA
Loop Current Mode Configure loop current mode:
Disabled = Multidrop Mode /
Enabled = Current Signal Mode
C6.8.2 Address Set address for HART® operation:
Select:
00 (Point-to-Point operation,;current output has normal function;
current = 4…20 mA) / 01...15 (Multi-Drop operation; current output has a
constant setting of 4 mA)
C6.8.3 Message Set required text:
A…Z ; a…z ; 0…9 ; / - + , . *
C6.8.4 Description Set required text:
A…Z ; a…z ; 0…9 ; / - + , . *
C6.8.5 HART Long tag Set the HART Long tags
C6.9 Quick Setup

C6.9 Quick Setup Activate quick access in the menu "Quick Setup"
Select: Yes (activated) / No (switched off)
C6.9.1 Reset Totaliser 1 Reset Totaliser 1 in menu "Quick Setup"
C6.9.4 Reset All Totalisers Reset all Totaliser in menu "Quick Setup"
6.4.4 Set free units
Free units Sequences to set texts and factors

Texts
Volume flow, mass flow and density: 3 digits before and after the slash
xxx/xxx (max. 6 characters plus a "/")
Permissible characters: A…Z; a…z; 0…9; / - + , . *; @ $ % ~ () [] _
Conversion factors
Desired unit = [unit see above] * conversion factor
Conversion factor Max. 9 digits
Shift decimal point: ↑ to the left and ↓ to the right
Page 247 of 307

6 OPERATION MFC 400
6.5 Description of functions

6.5.1 Reset totaliser in the menu "Quick Setup"
INFORMATION!
It may be necessary to activate resetting of the totaliser in the menu "Quick Setup".
Key Display Description and setting

> Quick Setup Press and hold for 2.5 s, then release the key.
> Language -
2x↓ Reset -
> Reset Errors -
↓ All Totaliser Select desired totaliser.
(Totaliser 3 is optional)
↓ Totaliser 1
↓ Totaliser 2
↓ Totaliser 3
> Reset Totaliser -
No
↓ or ↑ Reset Totaliser -
Yes
^ Totaliser 1,2 (or 3) Totaliser has been reset.
3x^ Measuring mode -
6.5.2 Deleting error messages in the menu "Quick Setup"

INFORMATION!
The detailed list of the possible error messages.

> Quick Setup Press and hold for 2.5 s, then release the key.
> Language -
2x↓ Reset -
> Reset Errors -
> Reset? -
No
↓ or ↑ Reset? -
Yes
^ Reset Errors Error has been reset.
3x^ Measuring mode -
Page 248 of 307

MFC 400 OPERATION 6
6.5.3 Operation Mode (menu A9)

The device can be switched to "Standby". In this mode, all flow values are set to zero and the
counter values are "frozen". The temperature and density values are displayed normally and
output via the outputs. The "Standby" indicator on the display shows either the "frozen" counter
value or simply "Standby". In this mode, the measuring tubes continue to vibrate and the device
can immediately return to "Measuring" mode if necessary.
There is also a "Stop" mode. In this mode, the measuring sensor is switched off and is no longer
vibrating. To return to measuring mode from this mode, the measuring device must go through
the complete "start-up" phase again before measurement continues.
The measuring device can be switched into "Standby" mode either using the operating keys on
the display or using the control input. You can only switch to "Stop" mode using the operating
keys.
Setting the operation mode (from measuring mode):

> A Quick Setup Press and hold for 2.5 s, then release
the key.
>↑ A9 Operation Mode
Measuring
> Operation Mode
Measuring
↑ Operation Mode
Standby
↑ Operation Mode
Stop
Yes
^ Display page
If "Standby" or "Stop" is selected, the device immediately switches to this operating state. To
return to the measuring mode, go to menu A9 and select "Measuring".
INFORMATION!
When changing from the "Stop" to "Standby" mode, the device goes through the entire start-up
phase.
In addition to the "Standby" mode, the system control function also allows you to switch to a
comparable "Standby" status completely automatically depending on the current operating
temperature or density.
Page 249 of 307

6 OPERATION MFC 400
6.5.4 Density calibration (menu C1.2.1)

Mass flowmeters are calibrated for density in the factory. Density calibration is based on 2
calibration points. In the factory, air and water are used under reference conditions. The result
of this calibration is saved in the converter electronics and stored in the factory settings.
Regardless, various applications require maximum accuracy which can only be achieved with
on-site calibration.
Available options:
Option Explanation
1 Point Calibration One of the 2 saved calibration points is replaced by customer calibration.
The signal converter decides which of the 2 calibration points is modified.
2nd Calibration Point Calibration of the 2nd point.
Factory Calib. The signal converter reactivates the factory settings for the density
calibration.
Example of 1 point calibration with town water

> A Quick Setup Press and hold for 2.5 s, then release
the key.
2x↓ C1 Setup
↓ C1.2 Density
2x> C1.2.1 Density Calibration?
1 Point Calibration
^ C1.2.1 Density Calib. Product
XXXXXXX
Press ↓ C1.2.1 Density Calib. Product
until Town Water
^ C1.2.1 Density Calibration?
OK
^ Please Wait
Countdown from 20 s
Density Calib.
Passed
Yes
^ Display page
Page 250 of 307

MFC 400 OPERATION 6
On-site density calibration:

• Ensure that the device has been properly installed and functions smoothly.
• If air (empty) is used as the medium, the measuring tube must be completely dry and free of
liquids and solids. If possible, blow dry air into the measuring tube to empty it.
• If liquids are used, flush for a few minutes at a high flow rate to remove gas bubbles.
• Set the flow rate to a typical value (50% of the nominal flow is ideal).
• If the process temperature is higher than the ambient temperature, wait until the system has
stabilised.
• When it comes to 1 point and 2 point calibration, you can choose from the options "empty",
"pure water", "town water" and "other". The reference values for the specified products are
stored in the converter.
Density calibration has failed if "Density Calib. Error" is displayed. The reason for the error may
be indicated on the display. Possible reasons for failed density calibration:
• The device is not in "Measuring" mode.

• The calibration points are too close together.
• One or more calibration points did not pass the plausibility test.
• Flow, pressure, temperature or system are not stable?
• Please check your system and try again.
• If this results in another failed calibration, please contact the manufacturer.
1 Point Calibration
• See examples for "Calibration with town water and other".
• Select the function using ↓ and ↑ and then confirm with ^.
• If "Other" is selected, the product density must be entered.
• 1 point calibration is generally sufficient for most applications, such as adapting the density
measurement to a new installation.
• Make sure that prior to calibrating the 2nd point that 1 point calibration was carried out and
that the result was saved with the dialog "Save Configuration?".
2 Point Calibration
• In this case, both reference points are recalibrated (with the products of the system).
• With 2 point calibration, ensure that both calibration points entered by the user are accepted.
If the 2nd point cannot be calibrated immediately after the first one, because the 2nd product is
not yet available, the device continues to function normally as after the 1 point calibration. In
other words, there can be weeks or even months between the calibration of the two measuring
points.
Page 251 of 307

6 OPERATION MFC 400
6.5.5 Temperature/density tables
Temperature Density Temperature Density
°C °F kg/m3 lb/ft3 °C °F kg/m3 lb/ft3

0 32 999.8396 62.41999 0.5 32.9 999.8712 62.42197
1 33.8 999.8986 62.42367 1.5 34.7 999.9213 62.42509
2 35.6 999.9399 62.42625 2.5 36.5 999.9542 62.42714
3 37.4 999.9642 62.42777 3.5 38.3 999.9701 62.42814
4 39.2 999.972 62.42825 4.5 40.1 999.9699 62.42812
5 41 999.9638 62.42774 5.5 41.9 999.954 62.42713
6 42.8 999.9402 62.42627 6.5 43.7 999.9227 62.42517
7 44.6 999.9016 62.42386 7.5 45.5 999.8766 62.4223
8 46.4 999.8482 62.42053 8.5 47.3 999.8162 62.4185
9 48.2 999.7808 62.41632 9.5 49.1 999.7419 62.41389
10 50 999.6997 62.41125 10.5 50.9 999.6541 62.40840
11 51.8 999.6051 62.40535 11.5 52.7 999.5529 62.40209
12 53.6 999.4975 62.39863 12.5 54.5 999.4389 62.39497
13 55.4 999.3772 62.39112 13.5 56.3 999.3124 62.38708
14 57.2 999.2446 62.38284 14.5 58.1 999.1736 62.37841
15 59 999.0998 62.3738 15.5 59.9 999.0229 62.36901
16 60.8 998.9432 62.36403 16.5 61.7 998.8607 62.35887
17 62.6 998.7752 62.35354 17.5 63.5 998.687 62.34803
18 64.4 998.596 62.34235 18.5 65.3 998.5022 62.3365
19 66.2 998.4058 62.33047 19.5 67.1 998.3066 62.32428
20 68 998.2048 62.31793 20.5 68.9 998.1004 62.31141
21 69.8 997.9934 62.30473 21.5 70.7 997.8838 62.29788
22 71.6 997.7716 62.29088 22.5 72.5 997.6569 62.28372
23 73.4 997.5398 62.27641 23.5 74.3 997.4201 62.26894
24 75.2 997.2981 62.26132 24.5 76.1 997.1736 62.25355
25 77 997.0468 62.24563 25.5 77.9 996.9176 62.23757
26 78.8 996.7861 62.22936 26.5 79.7 996.6521 62.22099
27 80.6 996.5159 62.21249 27.5 81.5 996.3774 62.20384
28 82.4 996.2368 62.19507 28.5 83.3 996.0939 62.18614
29 84.2 995.9487 62.17708 29.5 85.1 995.8013 62.16788
30 86 995.6518 62.15855 30.5 86.9 995.5001 62.14907
31 87.8 995.3462 62.13947 31.5 88.7 995.1903 62.12973
32 89.6 995.0322 62.11986 32.5 90.5 994.8721 62.10987
Page 252 of 307

MFC 400 OPERATION 6
33 91.4 994.71 62.09975 33.5 92.3 994.5458 62.08950

34 93.2 994.3796 62.07912 34.5 94.1 994.2113 62.06861
35 95 994.0411 62.05799 35.5 95.9 993.8689 62.04724
36 98.6 993.6948 62.03637 36.5 97.7 993.5187 62.02537
37 98.6 993.3406 62.01426 37.5 99.5 993.1606 62.00302
38 100.4 992.9789 61.99168 38.5 101.3 992.7951 61.98020
39 102.2 992.6096 61.96862 39.5 103.1 992.4221 61.95692
40 104 992.2329 61.9451 40.5 104.9 992.0418 61.93317
41 105.8 991.8489 61.92113 41.5 106.7 991.6543 61.90898
42 107.6 991.4578 61.89672 42.5 108.5 991.2597 61.88434
43 109.4 991.0597 61.87186 43.5 110.3 990.8581 61.85927
44 111.2 990.6546 61.84657 44.5 112.1 990.4494 61.83376
45 113 990.2427 61.82085 45.5 113.9 990.0341 61.80783
46 114.8 989.8239 61.79471 46.5 115.7 989.6121 61.78149
47 116.6 989.3986 61.76816 47.5 117.5 989.1835 61.75473
48 118.4 988.9668 61.7412 48.5 119.3 988.7484 61.72756
49 120.2 988.5285 61.71384 49.5 121.1 988.3069 61.70
50 122 988.0839 61.68608 50.5 122.9 987.8592 61.67205
51 123.8 987.6329 61.65793 51.5 124.7 987.4051 61.64371
52 125.6 987.1758 61.62939 52.5 126.5 986.945 61.61498
53 127.4 986.7127 61.60048 53.5 128.3 986.4788 61.58588
54 129.2 986.2435 61.57118 54.5 130.1 986.0066 61.5564
55 131 985.7684 61.54153 55.5 131.9 985.5287 61.52656
56 132.8 985.2876 61.5115 56.5 133.7 985.0450 61.49636
57 134.6 984.8009 61.48112 57.5 135.5 984.5555 61.4658
58 136.4 984.3086 61.45039 58.5 137.3 984.0604 61.43489
59 138.2 983.8108 61.41931 59.5 139.1 983.5597 61.40364
60 140 983.3072 61.38787 60.5 140.9 983.0535 61.37203
61 141.8 982.7984 61.35611 61.5 142.7 982.5419 61.34009
62 143.6 982.2841 61.324 62.5 144.5 982.0250 61.30783
63 145.4 981.7646 61.29157 63.5 146.3 981.5029 61.27523
64 147.2 981.2399 61.25881 64.5 148.1 980.9756 61.24231
65 149 980.7099 61.22573 65.5 149.9 980.4432 61.20907
Page 253 of 307

6 OPERATION MFC 400
66 150.8 980.1751 61.19233 66.5 151.7 979.9057 61.17552

67 152.6 979.6351 61.15862 67.5 153.5 979.3632 61.14165
68 154.4 979.0901 61.1246 68.5 155.3 978.8159 61.10748
69 156.2 978.5404 61.09028 69.5 157.1 978.2636 61.07300
70 158 977.9858 61.05566 70.5 158.9 977.7068 61.03823
71 159.8 977.4264 61.02074 71.5 160.7 977.145 61.00316
72 161.6 976.8624 60.98552 72.5 162.5 976.5786 60.96781
73 163.4 976.2937 60.95002 73.5 164.3 976.0076 60.93216
74 165.2 975.7204 60.91423 74.5 166.1 975.4321 60.89623
75 167 975.1428 60.87816 75.5 167.9 974.8522 60.86003
76 168.8 974.5606 60.84182 76.5 169.7 974.2679 60.82355
77 170.6 973.9741 60.80520 77.5 171.5 973.6792 60.7868
78 172.4 973.3832 60.76832 78.5 173.3 973.0862 60.74977
79 174.2 972.7881 60.73116 79.5 175.1 972.489 60.71249
80 176 972.188 60.69375
Page 254 of 307

MFC 400 OPERATION 6
6.5.6 Density mode (menu C1.2.2)

There are 4 available operating modes for density that can be set here:
• Process:
The device measures and displays the current operating density of the product.
• Fixed:
The device displays a fixed density value. This value must be entered in menu C1.2.3.
• Referred:
The device calculates the density based on a set reference temperature.
• Standard:
The device calculates the standard density based on a set reference temperature and the
correction factors k0...k2, so that a standard volume can be output.
The following equation is used for the "Referred" mode:
ρr = ρa + a (ta - tr)
ρr = Density at reference temperature

ρa = Current measured operating density at current operating temperature
a = Programmed temperature coefficient/density gradient
ta = Current measured operating temperature
tr = Reference temperature
The reference temperature must be entered in menu item C1.2.3. The density gradient is set in
C1.2.4.
Figure 6-7: Calculating the density gradient

1 Density
2 Temperature
The following equation is used to calculate the density gradient:
a = (ρD - ρC) / (TB - TA)
The value for the density gradient is generally positive as an increase in temperature usually
reduces the measured density(exception: water anomaly).
Page 255 of 307

6 OPERATION MFC 400
Calculating the standard density
The measuring device can display a density which has been corrected in terms of the standard
temperature in accordance with API 11.1. Standard 2540.
The corresponding reference temperature is entered in menu C1.2.5. The correction factors
k0...k2 are entered in menu C1.2.6...C1.2.8.
Standard factors for gasolines are: k0 = 346.4228; k1 = 0.4388; k2 = 0
6.5.7 Pipe diameter (menu C1.1.3)

The converter can also provide the flow velocity based on a pipe diameter which the customer
can freely program. This value can either be the inner diameter of the measuring tube (factory
default) or the inner diameter of the process pipe.
6.5.8 Concentration measurement (menu C2)

This menu is used to enter the password to activate concentration measurement (in case the
concentration option is purchased) after the meter is delivered.
INFORMATION!
Please refer to the separate concentration manual for further details of concentration
measurement.
6.5.9 Flow direction (menu C1.3.1)

This function allows the operator to set the direction of flow in relation to the arrow on the
housing. If "Forwards" is selected, the flow direction corresponds to the "+" arrow and with
"Backwards" the flow direction corresponds to the "-" arrow on the housing.
Page 256 of 307

MFC 400 OPERATION 6
6.5.10 Pressure suppression

The pressure suppression eliminates any disruption in the measurement in the event of an
abrupt flow switch-off e.g. when valves are suddenly closed. In such cases, surges may occur in
the pipe and in the measuring device which could lead to over-vibration. The flow then "swings"
back and forth before a stable zero flow is established, as shown in the figure below. This effect
occurs mainly in high pressure applications.
Figure 6-8: Vibration behaviour during pressure suppression

1 Flow switched off
2 Sinusoidal vibration ("over-vibration")
3 Stable zero flow
Page 257 of 307

6 OPERATION MFC 400
In most cases, the amplitude of this vibration is below the low flow cutoff and thus does not affect
the measurement. In very few cases, the amplitude is greater than the low flow cutoff (over-
vibration) and can cause errors with the counter values.
Figure 6-9: Amplitude behaviour

1 Low flow cutoff
2 Low flow cutoff
3 Pressure suppression
4 Pressure suppression
The pressure suppression function eliminates this effect by activating a larger low flow cutoff
level for a short period of time. The pressure suppression is activated when the flow falls below
the standard low flow cutoff level for the first time. For a programmable period of time, (can be
programmed in menu C1.3.2), the pressure suppression threshold is added to the standard low
flow threshold (can be set in menu C1.3.3).
The optimal setting values for pressure suppression depend on the current operating conditions
and can thus only be determined on-site through testing.
Page 258 of 307

MFC 400 OPERATION 6
6.5.11 System control

Menu C1.4.1 - Function
This menu makes it possible to switch off certain measuring functions depending on a
programmable process state. When this system state occurs (as set in Fct. C1.4.2), the following
options can be activated:
• Inactive: system control is off

• Flow = 0: Flow set to zero
Menu C1.4.2 - Condition

Selecting the process measurement which activates the system control. Density and
temperature can be selected.
Menu C1.4.3 – Max Limit

Menu C1.4.4 – Min Limit
Setting the limit values to activate system control. Current measuring values outside of this
range activate this function.
Page 259 of 307

6 OPERATION MFC 400
6.5.12 2 Ph. Threshold (menu C1.5.3)

The threshold for the 2 phase signal can be set in this menu item. This makes it possible to
output a status signal indicating the presence of gas bubbles in the process. There are no default
values for this threshold. This means that the operator must adapt this value to suit his
application. This can be done, for example, by programming the 2 phase signal at the current
output and registering which threshold makes sense for the respective process for a certain
time period.
Example regarding the detection and notification of a two-phase disturbed flow (e.g.
gas bubbles in paints):
Fct. Display Description and setting
B2.14 2 Phase Signal The 2-phase signal value in % can be read
and transferred to Diagnosis 1.
C1.5.3 2 Ph. Threshold Only input a value here if an error message
is to be generated.
This error message can be displayed via the
status outputs.
The error message is then indicated on the
display as S: Out Of Specification and
S: 2 Phase Flow indicated on the display.
Caution: Take into account the setting of the

error conditions of the current output!
C1.5.4 Diagnosis 1 Set "2 Phase Signal".
C3.1.3 Terminals C Set "Limit Switch".
C3.4.1 Measurement Set "Diagnosis 1".
C3.4.2 Threshold e.g. set to "2.0 ± 0.2%".
C3.4.3 Polarity e.g. set to "Absolute Value".
C3.4.4 Time Constant Set as needed.
C3.4.4 Invert Signal Set as needed.
C6.4.1 2nd Meas. Page Set "Three Lines".
C6.4.10 3rd Line Variable Set "Diagnosis 1".
C6.4.11 3rd Line Format Set "X.XX".
The 2 phase signal is displayed on the 2nd measuring page at the bottom with e.g.: 0.02%. If the
threshold is exceeded (C3.4.2), a message is sent via terminals C.
Page 260 of 307

MFC 400 OPERATION 6
6.5.13 Diagnosis messages (menu C1.5.7....C1.5.14)

These settings make it possible to change the status signal of the respective diagnosis message
(status group).
6.5.14 Optical keys (C6.2.4)

This function can deactivate the optical keys. In the display, the switched off state of the optical
keys is represented by a lock 1.
In this case, the device may only be operated using the push buttons.
6.5.15 Graphic page (menu C6.5)

With this converter, the trend of the main measurement can be graphically displayed. The first
measurement on display page 1 is always defined as the main measurement.
• Menu C6.5.1 defines the range for the trend indicator (manual or automatic).
• Menu C6.5.2 defines the range for manual setting.
• Menu C6.5.3 defines the time span for the trend indicator.
6.5.16 Save settings (menu C6.6.2)

This function allows all settings to be stored in a memory.
• Backup 1: Saves settings in backup memory area 1

• Backup 2: Saves settings in backup memory area 2
6.5.17 Load settings (menu C6.6.3)

This function allows the complete stored settings to be loaded again.
• Backup 1: Loading from backup - memory 1

• Backup 2: Loading from backup - memory 2
• Factory: Uploading the original factory settings
Page 261 of 307

6 OPERATION MFC 400
6.5.18 Passwords (Menu 6.6.4 Quick Set; Menu 6.6.5 Setup)

To create a password for the Quick Set menu or Setup menu, you must enter a 4-digit code into
the menu. You are then prompted for this password every time changes are to be made to the
corresponding menus. There is a hierarchy. The Setup password can also be used to perform
changes in the Quick Setup menu. Enter 0000 in each menu to disable the password.
6.5.19 Date and time (C6.6.6)

The signal converter has a real time clock which is used for all of the log functions in the device.
This function can be used to set the date and time of the real time clock.
6.5.20 Quick Access (C6.6.7)

In measuring mode, pressing the ^ key for 2.5 seconds carries out the "Quick Access" function.
Totalisers 1, 2, 3 and All Totalisers can be reset.
6.5.21 Low flow cutoff

The low flow cutoff can be individually set for each output and each display line. If the low flow
cutoff has been activated, the respective output or display is set to zero when the flow is below
the low flow cutoff value entered.
The value can either be entered as a percentage of the nominal flow of the sensor or, in the case
of a pulse output, as a discrete flow value.
Two values must be entered. The first is for the operating point of the sensor and the second is
for hysterisis. Condition: 1st value > 2nd value
1 Flow
2 Time
3 Currently indicated flow
4 Display set to zero
5 Currently indicated flow
6 Positive hysteresis
7 Operating point
8 Negative hysteresis
Page 262 of 307

MFC 400 OPERATION 6
6.5.22 Time constant

To better process widely fluctuating measured values in the device, the measured values are
digitally filtered to stabilise the output. The time constant can be individually set for each output,
the first line of the display and the density measurement. However, keep in mind that the degree
of filtration affects the response time of the device in the event of rapid changes.
Short time constant Fast response times

Fluctuating reading
Long time constant Slow response time
Stable reading
The time constant corresponds to the elapsed time until 67% of the end value has been reached
according to a step function.
6.5.23 Dual phase pulse output

A dual phase pulse or frequency output is often required for custody transfer applications. This
operating mode requires 2 terminal pairs. Terminal pairs A and B or D and B can be used.
In this case, perform the following settings:

• C3.3.11: Phase shift to D or shift to A
• All functions for output B are set using output D or output A.
• C3.5.11: Setting phase shift from output B relative to D, if terminal pair D was selected in
C3.3.11. 0°, 90° or 180° are offered as options.
• C3.2.11: Setting the phase shift from output B relative to A, if terminal pair A was selected in
C3.3.11 0°, 90° or 180° are offered as options.
6.5.24 Timeouts in programming mode

Normal menu function: If no key has been pressed for 5 minutes in a normal menu function, the
display automatically switches to measuring mode. All changes are lost.
Test function: In test mode, the test function is finished after 60 minutes.
GDC IR Interface: If the GDC-IR connection is activated, it is cancelled after 60 seconds if no

connection is established. If the connection is interrupted, the display can be operated again
after 60 seconds using the optical keys.
Page 263 of 307

6 OPERATION MFC 400
6.5.25 Output hardware

Depending on the hardware modules used (see CG number), it may be possible to change the
output options on terminals A, B, C or D in the menus C3.1.x. For example: A pulse output to a
frequency output or a status output to a control input.
The available options are determined by the hardware module used. It is not possible to change
the type of output, e.g. from active to passive or to NAMUR.
6.6 Status messages and diagnostic information

The diagnostic messages are displayed in accordance with NAMUR standard NE 107. The error
messages for the device are divided into status groups, each with one status signal. There are 16
status groups with fixed status signals and 8 groups with variable status signals. To facilitate
identification of the problem source, the status groups are then divided into the groups: Sensor,
Electronics, Configuration and Process.
The variable status signal can be changed in menu C1.5.7...C1.5.14. Changing the status signal to
"Information" switches off the message.
INFORMATION!
As status message always the name of the relevant status group and the status signal (F/S/M/C)
is displayed.
Each status message (= status signal) has a specific symbol, determined by NAMUR, which is
displayed with the message. The length of each message is limited to one line.
Symbol Letter Status signal Description and consequence

F Failure No measurement possible.
S Out of specification Measurements are available but are

no longer sufficiently accurate and
should be checked
M Maintenance required Measurements are still accurate but
this could soon change
C Function check A test function is active; The displayed

or transferred measured value does
not correspond to the actual measured
value.
I Information No direct influence on the
measurements
All status messages are saved in the status log (menu B3.1). Use the ↑ and ↓ keys to navigate
through this list. Use the ^ key to exit the list.
The status screen shows the status groups of all errors that have occurred since the last time
the status screen was opened. All errors that are not current disappear after 2 seconds. They
are shown in the list in brackets.
Page 264 of 307

MFC 400 OPERATION 6
Legend
Fixed status signal
Variable status signal
Error Event group Single event Description Actions to eliminate the

type event
F F Sensor
Sensor Containment Dam. High pressure detected in Exchange measuring
housing. Faulty measuring sensor.
tube.
Sensor Error The measuring sensor Check connection between
signals are out of range. measuring sensor and
Flow measurements are not signal converter (remote
possible. version) or replace
measuring sensor.
F F Electronics
System Error Electronics error in internal Perform cold start. If
bus communication or due message reappears, contact
System Error A to a hardware error. manufacturer.
System Error C
HW Combination Error
BM Failure
DM Failure
Process Input Failure
IO 1 Failure
IO 2 Failure
Tot 1 Failure
Tot 2 Failure
Tot 3 Failure
IO A Failure
IO B Failure
IO C Failure
F F Configuration
BM Configuration Error detected when Check settings of
starting device. Possible appropriate function or load
DM Configuration causes: inadmissible factory settings. If the error
parameter settings or fault persists, contact
with electronics component. manufacturer.
Process Input Config. Settings for process input Check settings for process
invalid. input or load factory
settings.
Density Calib. Density calibration Perform density calibration.
parameters invalid. Check product and function
mode.
Page 265 of 307

6 OPERATION MFC 400
Error Event group Single event Description Actions to eliminate the

type event
Fieldbus Config. Inadmissible Fieldbus Check Fieldbus settings or
settings load factory settings.
PROFIBUS Config. Inadmissible Profibus Check PROFIBUS settings or
Tot 1 FB4 Unit Error Totaliser is out of operation Check unit in totaliser 1 FB4
due to inadmissible unit. or load factory settings.
Tot 2 FB5 Unit Error Check unit in totaliser 2 FB5
or load factory settings.
Tot 3 FB6 Unit Error Check unit in totaliser 3 FB6
or load factory settings.
Modbus Config. Inadmissible Modbus Check Modbus settings or
Display Config. Inadmissible settings for the Check display settings or
display load factory settings.
IO1 Configuration Inadmissible settings for IO1 Check settings for IO1 or
load factory settings.
IO2 Configuration Inadmissible settings for IO2 Check settings for IO2 or
load factory settings.
Tot 1 Configuration Inadmissible settings for Check settings for totaliser 1
totaliser 1 or load factory settings.
IO A Configuration Inadmissible settings for IO Check settings for IO A or
A load factory settings.
IO B Configuration Inadmissible settings for IO Check settings for IO B or
B load factory settings.
IO C Configuration Inadmissible settings for IO Check settings for IO C or
C load factory settings.
IO D Configuration Inadmissible settings for IO Check settings for IO D or
D load factory settings.
F F Process
C C Sensor
C C Electronics
Page 266 of 307

MFC 400 OPERATION 6
C C Configuration
Sensor in Stop Mode The device is in stop mode. Switch to measuring mode
No flow measurement is for normal operation.
being performed. All flow-
related values displayed are
substitute values. The
measuring tube is not
vibrating.
Sensor in Standby Mode The device is in standby
mode. No flow
measurement is being
performed. All flow-related
values displayed are
substitute values. The
measuring tube continues to
vibrate.
Sensor Simulation Active Simulation of mass flow, Switch off measured value
volume flow, density or simulation.
temperature.
Sensor Starting up The sensor is in start-up
mode. This is a normal state
following a switch from stop
mode to measuring mode.
The error message "Sensor:
Startup" becomes active
when this state goes on too
long or is unexpected.
Fieldbus Sim. Active The simulation function in Check Fieldbus settings.
the Foundation Fieldbus
module is active and being
used.
PROFIBUS Sim/Man Active The simulation function in Check PROFIBUS settings.
the PROFIBUS module is
active and being used.
Totaliser 1 FB4 Sim. Active The simulation function in Switch off simulation.
the PROFIBUS module is
Totaliser 2 FB5 Sim. Active active and being used.
Totaliser 3 FB6 Sim. Active
Totaliser 1 FB4 Man. Active The manual mode in the Switch of manual mode.
PROFIBUS module is active.
Totaliser 2 FB5 Man. Active
Totaliser 3 FB6 Man. Active
IO A Simulation Active IO A simulation is active. Switch off simulation.
IO B Simulation Active IO B simulation is active.
IO C Simulation Active IO C simulation is active.
IO D Simulation Active IO D simulation is active.
C C Process
S S Sensor
Temp. Or Strain Res. Def. The resistance network for Check connection between
temperature and strain measuring sensor and
measurement is operated signal converter (remote
outside of specifications and version) or replace
is possibly faulty. The measuring sensor.
measured values for flow
and density remain valid
however the accuracy is
undetermined. The
temperature measurement
has failed.
Page 267 of 307

6 OPERATION MFC 400
S S Electronics
Electr.Temp.A Out of Spec Temperature of the signal Protect signal converter
converter electronics is out from process effects and
Electr.Temp.C Out of Spec of range. sunlight.
Electr.Temp. Out of Spec
S S Configuration
IO A Overrange The output value is limited When limiting the input
by a filter. value, refer to the actions
IO B Overrange listed there. Check the
IO C Overrange range setting of the output.
IO D Overrange
S S Process
Proc.Temp.Out of Range The process temperature is Check process conditions.
out of range. The
measurement continues but
the accuracy is
undetermined.
Flow Out of Range The flow is out of range. The
actual flow is higher than
the displayed value.
Prod.Density Out of Range The density is out of range. Check process conditions
The measurement continues and density calibration.
but the accuracy of the
density and flow is
undetermined.
Velocity Out of Range The flow is out of range. The Check process conditions
actual flow is higher or and pipe diameter setting.
lower than the value
displayed.
M M Sensor
M M Electronics
Backplane Data Faulty The backplane data record is Check the correct
faulty. installation of the signal
converter electronics. After
changing one parameter,
the message should
disappear within one
minute. If not, contact the
manufacturer.
Factory Data Faulty Factory settings are invalid. Contact manufacturer.
Backplane Difference The data on the backplane After changing one
differ from the data in the parameter, the message
device. should disappear within one
minute. If not, contact the
manufacturer.
Mem. Life Exceeded The number of maximum Exchange the signal
write cycles is exceeded for converter electronics.
the memory component.
Page 268 of 307

MFC 400 OPERATION 6
M M
Configuration
Backup 1 Data Faulty Error when checking the Use "Setup > Device >
data record for Backup 1. Special Functions > Save
Settings" to save the data
Backup 2 Data Faulty Error when checking the record. If the message
data record for Backup 2. continues to appear, contact
the manufacturer.
M M Process
F F Proc: Current
Input
IO A Error Current Error current is detected at Check device connected to

current input A. current input A. This devices
submits an error current.
IO B Error Current Error current is detected at Check device connected to
current input B. current input B. This devices
submits an error current.
S S Electr: IO
Connection
IO A Connection Current output A cannot Check connection at A.

provide the necessary Measure resistance of
current. The current current loop at A.
provided is too low. The Check current at A.
current at input A is below
0.5 mA or above 23 mA.
IO A Connection Open circuit or short circuit
at IO A.
IO B Connection Current output B cannot Check connection at B.
current. The current current loop at B.
provided is too low. The Check current at B.
current at input B is below
0.5 mA or above 23 mA.
IO B Connection Open circuit or short circuit
at IO B.
IO C Open Connector Current output C cannot Check connection at C.
current. current loop at C.
The current provided is too
low.
F F Proc: Signal
Search
Sensor signal search The measuring sensor Check process conditions. In
signals are too small for an the case of a measuring
accurate flow measurement. sensor in remote version,
The cause is typically too check the electrical
much damping, e.g. due to connection between the field
gas bubbles or the viscosity housing and the measuring
is too high. sensor.
S S Proc: 2 Phase
Flow
2 Phase Flow Detected 2 phase flow has been Check product for gas
detected. The accuracy of bubbles.
the flow and density
measurement is
undetermined.
Page 269 of 307

6 OPERATION MFC 400
S S Proc: Signal
Low
Sensor signal low The sensor signals do not Check the product for
reach the expected viscosity and gas bubbles.
amplitude. This can
influence the measuring
accuracy.
S S Config:
Totaliser
Tot 1 FB4 Overflow Totaliser 1 FB4 has Check totaliser format.
overflowed and started
again at zero.
Tot 2 FB5 Overflow Totaliser 2 FB5 has
again at zero.
Tot 3 FB6 Overflow Totaliser 3 FB6 has
again at zero.
Tot 1 Overflow Totaliser 1 has overflowed
and started again at zero.
I I Proc: System
Control
System Control Active System control is active.

I I Electr: Power
Failure
Tot 1 Power Failure Totaliser 1 invalid due to Check the value of the
power failure. totaliser.
Tot 2 Power Failure Totaliser 2 invalid due to
power failure.
Tot 3 Power Failure Totaliser 3 invalid due to
power failure.
Tot 1 FB4 Power Failure Totaliser 1 FB4 invalid due
to power failure.
to power failure.
to power failure.
Power Failure Detected Power failure has occurred.
The totaliser state may be
invalid.
Page 270 of 307

MFC 400 OPERATION 6
I I Config: No
Meas.Value
IO A No Meas. Values The measurement value for Select another
the IO terminals A is not measurement for IO A in
active. menu C3.2 or activate the
measurement in C5.1 for
diagnosis values or in menu
C2 for concentration values.
IO B No Meas. Values The measurement value for Select another
the IO terminals B is not measurement for IO B in
IO C No Meas. Values The measurement value for Select another
the IO terminals C is not measurement for IO C in
IO D No Meas. Values The measurement value for Select another
the IO terminals D is not measurement for IO D in
Tot 1 No Meas. Values The measurement value for Select another
the totaliser 1 is not active. measurement for totaliser 1
in menu C4.1 or activate the
Disp. 1 No Meas. Values Measurement value at 1st Select another
measuring page is not measurement for 1st
active. measuring page or activate
the measurement in C1.5 for
Disp. 2 No Meas. Values Measurement value at 2nd Select another
measuring page is not measurement for 2nd
active. measuring page or activate
the measurement in C1.5 for
Page 271 of 307

6 OPERATION MFC 400
I I Electr.
Operation Info.
Zero Calibr. Running A zero calibration is

performed.
PROFIBUS No Data No data exchange via Set up cyclical PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS. communication.
PROFIBUS Baudrate PROFIBUS searches for the Check PROFIBUS terminal
current Baudrate. and connection.
PROFIBUS Passivated PROFIBUS module is Disable PROFIBUS
passivated. passivation.
PROFIBUS Clear Data PROFIBUS Clear Data is Start of cyclic PROFIBUS
active communication
PROFIBUS Sync Mode PROFIBUS Sync Mode is Disable Sync Mode.
active.
PROFIBUS Freeze Mode PROFIBUS Freeze Mode is Disable Freeze Mode.
active.
Tot 1 Stopped Totaliser 1 was stopped. If totaliser is to continue
counting, select "Yes" in
Tot 2 Stopped Totaliser 2 was stopped. Fct. C.y.9 (Start Totaliser).
Tot 3 Stopped Totaliser 3 was stopped.
Tot 1 FB4 Threshold Tot 1 FB4 Threshold Reset Totaliser 1 FB4.
exceeded.
exceeded.
exceeded.
Control In A Active
Control In B Active
Status Out A Active
Status Out B Active
Status Out C Active
Status Out D Active
Fieldbus No Connection Check Fieldbus terminal and
connection.
Disp. 1 Overrange The value in the 1st Check setting for 1st
measurement line of the measurement line.
display page is limited.
Disp. 2 Overrange The value in the 2nd Check setting for 2nd
measurement line of the measurement line.
display page is limited.
Optical Interf. Active The optical interface is being The keys are ready for
used. The optical keys are operation again approx. 60
deactivated. seconds after the end of the
data transfer/removal of the
optical interface.
Page 272 of 307

MFC 400 OPERATION 6
6.7 Function tests and troubleshooting

Min. and max. recorded temperature (menu C1.5.1 / C1.5.2)
Stores the minimum and maximum value for the temperature occurring during sensor operating
time.
Flow sensor type Operating temperature
Minimum Maximum
OPTIMASS 1000 -40°C / -40°F +130°C / +266°F
OPTIMASS 2000
OPTIMASS 3000 +150°C / +302°F
(Stainless steel or Hastelloy®)
OPTIMASS 6000 (standard -70°C / -94°F +230°C / +446°F
version)
OPTIMASS 6000 (cryogenic -200°C / -328°F +40°C / +104°F
version)
OPTIMASS 6000 (high -50°C / -58°F +400°C / +752°F
temperature version)
OPTIMASS 6000 (Hastelloy C) -70°C / -94°F +230°C / +446°F
OPTIMASS 6000 (Duplex) -50°C / -58°F +230°C / +446°F
OPTIMASS 7000 (titanium) -40°C / -40°F +150°C / +302°F
OPTIMASS 7000 0°C / +32°F +100°C / +212°F
(Hastelloy®/tantalum)
OPTIMASS 7000 (stainless steel) 0°C / +32°F +100°C / +212°F
+130°C / +266°F
Application problems that may indicate errors in the signal converter:

• An improperly closed shut-off valve during zero calibration results in high calibration values
• Air/gas bubbles result in high energy levels and high calibration values
• Product deposits on the inside of the measuring tube lead to higher/lower density indications
and high calibration values
Common errors (with corresponding symptoms):

• Slightly eroded or corroded measuring tube
- Erroneous density measurement
- High frequency
- Measurement error at low mass flow
• Eroded or corroded measuring tube (product in the housing)
- Measuring tube does not start
- Low resistance to earth with conducting product
• Open circuits of drive and sensor coils or resistance thermometers (RTD)
- Can be measured with ohmmeter
Page 273 of 307

6 OPERATION MFC 400
Typical frequency values (at +20°C / +68°F)

Size Titanium Stainless steel Hastelloy® Tantalum
Empty Water Empty Water Empty Water Empty Water

1000 - 15 438±10 412±10
1000 - 25 605±20 523±20
1000 - 40 494±10 414±10
1000 - 50 583±10 453±10
2000 - 100 341±6 267±6
2000 - 150 330±6 259±6
2000 - 250 299±6 227±6
3000 - 01 258±6 251±6 266±6 258±6
3000 - 03 320±6 310±6 320±6 310±6
3000 - 04 455±6 435±6 455±6 435±6
6000 - 08 220 205 220 205
6000 - 10 187 172 187 172
6000 - 15 212 191 212 191
6000 - 25 266 231 266 231
6000 - 50 262 230 262 230
6000 - 80 234 203 234 203
6000 - 100 257 221 257 221
6000 - 150 245 208 245 208
6000 - 200 218 184 218 184
6000 - 250 187 160 187 160
7000 - 06 316±10 301±10 374±10 362±10
7000 - 10 406±10 371±10 441±10 417±10 439±10 416±10 348±10 330±10
7000 - 15 502±10 432±10 578±10 519±10 566±10 509±10 430±10 394±10
7000 - 25 614±10 483±10 692±10 580±10 687±10 581±10 515±10 449±10
7000 - 40 462±10 367±10 558±10 467±10 556±10 468±10 417±10 360±10
7000 - 50 488±10 357±10 514±10 418±10 539±10 431±10 403±10 333±10
7000 - 80 480±10 338±10 490±10 370±10 493±10 381±10
Problems with zero calibration

1 Stop the flow.
2 Set the totaliser in Fct. C3.y.1 to "Absolute Total".
3 Set the low flow cutoff in Fct. C3.y.3 to zero.
4 Perform automatic zero calibration.
5 Reset totaliser and count for 2 minutes.
6 Compare the added value to the specified zero calibration stability.
INFORMATION!
For best results, perform zero calibration with the medium at operating temperature.
Page 274 of 307

MFC 400 OPERATION 6
Possible causes of poor zero calibration:

• Valves not completely closed, air or gas bubbles or deposits on measuring tube
6.8 Diagnostic functions

The following diagnostic functions are available in test menu B2.
6.8.1 Temperature (menu B2.7)

Temperature display in °C or °F.
• This value should be steadily displayed.

• Unstable values may mean a faulty Pt500 or that liquid is in the outer housing.
6.8.2 Frequency (menu B2.10)

• Fluctuation in the first decimal places indicate gas or air bubbles in the product.
• Worn or eroded measuring tube: frequency increases by around 2…4 Hz; recalibration
required.
• Formation of a coating can reduce vibration frequency, depending on the type of coating and
the layer thickness. If, however, the density of the coating is the same as for the flowing
medium, no frequency is observed.
• Large fluctuations in frequency occur in the "start-up" phase.
6.8.3 Drive level (menu B2.11)

Display of the drive energy in percent.
Typical values for drive energy in water and with no gas inclusions
All meters All sizes 0...25
INFORMATION!
Higher values for drive energy can occur when the product contains air or gas bubbles or when
measuring products with high viscosity or density.
Page 275 of 307

6 OPERATION MFC 400
6.8.4 Sensor levels A and B (menu B2.12, B2.13)

Display of the sensor reading in percent.
Typical values
Size Standard (+230°C / +446°F) / +400°C / +752°F
Cryogenic
6000 - 08 60 TBD
6000 - 10 55 TBD
6000 - 15 60 TBD
6000 - 25 80 25
6000 - 50 80 25
6000 - 80 70 25
6000 - 100 80 30
Size Standard
1000 - 15/25/40 80
1000 - 50 60
2000 - 100 60
2000 - 150/250 50
7000 - 06/10/15/25/40 80
7000 - 50/80 60
INFORMATION!
• This value should correspond to the amplitude setting in menu D1.4.1 and should not be more
than 2% apart.
• Low sensor A/B value indicate damping of the transducer due to air entrainment or poor
mixed solids. The accuracy of the meter may be affected.
• Significant differences between the two sensor values could indicate a problem with one of
the sensors, coating/erosion towards one side of the measuring tube or process related
issue.
6.8.5 2 phase signal (menu B2.14)

The value of the 2 phase signal can be read in this function. For applications that must detect 2
phase flow, an alarm level can be programmed. This alarm level depends on the application and
the process and can thus only be set on-site under current operating conditions during flow. For
detailed information refer to 2 Ph. Threshold (menu C1.5.3) on page 100.
Page 276 of 307

MFC 400 SERVICE 7
7.1 Replacing the signal converter electronics

DANGER!
Work on the signal converter electronics may only be performed when disconnected from the
power supply.
DANGER!
Observe the waiting period for Ex devices.
WARNING!
specialists.
• Remove the front panel. Use a small screwdriver to open the plastic clips that hold the display.
• Remove the 2 locking screws.
• Carefully pull the electronics almost completely out of the housing.
• Remove the 2 connecting cables from the electronics before removing the signal converter
electronics to be replaced.
• To insert the new electronics, first connect the 2 connecting cables to the electronics.
• Carefully push the electronics back into the housing.
• Tighten the 2 locking screws again and secure the display.
i The measuring system recognises the hardware replacement when the power supply is
switched on.
Page 277 of 307

7 SERVICE MFC 400
7.2 Driver or sensor coil fault

Typical inductance and resistance values
7.2.1 OPTIMASS 1000

The specified values are for guidance only.
Size Resistance (Ω)
Driver Sensor A/B

15 68 84
25 68 64
40 68 84
50 68 64
• Driver = black and grey

• Sensor A = white and yellow
• Sensor B = green and violet
• Pt500 = red and blue (530…550 Ω) at ambient temperature
• Strain values measuring tube = 420...560 Ω
• Resistance values outside of the ranges specified above may indicate a circuit error. The
device may be in "start-up" mode or indicate measuring errors.
• All circuits should be isolated with respect to earth (device housing) and each other >20 MΩ.
• A driver/sensor coil short circuit may cause the meter to be in "start-up" mode.
INFORMATION!
Failure of two or more of the upper circuits may indicate a measuring tube error. There may be
product in the housing. If this is the case, depressurise the process line and immediately remove
the measuring device from the process line.
Page 278 of 307

MFC 400 SERVICE 7
7.2.2 OPTIMASS 2000

Driver Sensor A/B

100 35 108
150 35 87
250 35 87

• Strain values measuring tube = 420...560 Ω
INFORMATION!
Page 279 of 307

7 SERVICE MFC 400
7.2.3 OPTIMASS 3000

Damaged magnetic coil: inductance values in parentheses.
Size Inductance (mH) Resistance (Ω)
Driver Sensor A/B Driver Sensor A/B

01 1.2 (0.6) 7.4 57 107
03 / 04 2.4 (1.2) 10.1 47 135
• Driver = black/violet and grey/orange

• Sensor B = green and yellow
INFORMATION!
Page 280 of 307

MFC 400 SERVICE 7
7.2.4 OPTIMASS 6000

Driver Sensor A - Sensor B
black/grey purple/green - white/yellow
Cryo +230°C / +400°C / +752°F Cryo +230°C / +400°C / +752°F

+446°F +446°F
6000 - 08 72 TBD 273 TBD
6000 - 10 68 TBD 273 TBD
6000 - 15 68 TBD 273 TBD
6000 - 25 42 12 185 45
6000 - 50 42 52 185 45
6000 - 80 42 52 185 45
6000 - 100 42 54 185 45
Typical RTD resistances

Resistance (Ω)
Pt500 Compensation lines
red/brown brown/orange
6000 - all sizes 540 at +20°C / +68°F 0.1
INFORMATION!
Page 281 of 307

7 SERVICE MFC 400
7.2.5 OPTIMASS 7000

Driver Sensor A/B

06 / 10 91 142
15 73 142
25 69 142
40 / 50 / 80 48 142

Strain MT = red and brown OPTIMASS 7000 - all sizes 420...560 Ω at ambient
temperature
Strain IC = brown and orange OPTIMASS 7000 - 06...10 225...275 Ω at ambient
temperature
OPTIMASS 7000 - 15...80 Short circuited
INFORMATION!
Page 282 of 307

MFC 400 SERVICE 7
7.3 Spare parts availability

The manufacturer adheres to the basic principle that functionally adequate spare parts for each
device or each important accessory part will be kept available for a period of 3 years after
delivery of the last production run for the device.
This regulation only applies to spare parts which are subject to wear and tear under normal
operating conditions.
7.4 Availability of services

The manufacturer offers a range of services to support the customer after expiration of the
warranty. These include repair, maintenance, technical support and training.
INFORMATION!
For more precise information, please contact your local sales office.
7.5 Returning the device to the manufacturer

7.5.1 General information
This device has been carefully manufactured and tested. If installed and operated in accordance
with these operating instructions, it will rarely present any problems.
CAUTION!
Should you nevertheless need to return a device for inspection or repair, please pay strict
attention to the following points:
• Due to statutory regulations on environmental protection and safeguarding the health and
safety of the personnel, the manufacturer may only handle, test and repair returned devices
that have been in contact with products without risk to personnel and environment.
• This means that the manufacturer can only service this device if it is accompanied by the
following certificate (see next section) confirming that the device is safe to handle.
CAUTION!
If the device has been operated with toxic, caustic, flammable or water-endangering products,
you are kindly requested:
• to check and ensure, if necessary by rinsing or neutralising, that all cavities are free from
such dangerous substances,
• to enclose a certificate with the device confirming that is safe to handle and stating the
product used.
Page 283 of 307

7 SERVICE MFC 400
7.5.2 Form (for copying) to accompany a returned device

CAUTION!
To avoid any risk for our service personel, this form has to be accessible from outside of the
packaging with the returned device.
Company: Address:
Department: Name:
Tel. no.: Fax no. and/or Email address:
Manufacturer's order no. or serial no.:
The device has been operated with the following medium:
This medium is: radioactive

water-hazardous
toxic
caustic
flammable
We checked that all cavities in the device are free from such substances.
We have flushed out and neutralized all cavities in the device.
We hereby confirm that there is no risk to persons or the environment through any residual media contained in the
device when it is returned.
Date: Signature:
Stamp:
7.6 Disposal
CAUTION!
Disposal must be carried out in accordance with legislation applicable in your country.
Separate collection of WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment) in the European Union:
According to the directive 2012/19/EU, the monitoring and control instruments marked with the
WEEE symbol and reaching their end-of-life must not be disposed of with other waste.
waste
The user must dispose of the WEEE to a designated collection point for the recycling of WEEE or
send them back to our local organisation or authorised representative.
Page 284 of 307

8.1 Measuring principle

The signal converter has been designed to work with all the measuring tube designs used in the
mass flowmeters. For information regarding the measuring principle for a specific measuring
tube design, please refer to the technical documentation of the relevant flow sensor.
8.2 Technical data

INFORMATION!
documentation can be downloaded free of charge from the website (Downloadcenter).
Measuring system
Measuring principle Coriolis principle
Application range Measurement of mass flow, density, temperature, volume flow, flow velocity,
concentration
Design
Modular construction The measuring system consists of a flow sensor and a signal converter.
Flow sensor
OPTIMASS 1000 DN15…50 / ½…2"
OPTIMASS 2000 DN100…250 / 4...10"
OPTIMASS 3000 DN01…04 / 1/25...4/25"
OPTIMASS 6000 DN08…250 / 3/8...10"
OPTIMASS 7000 DN06…80 / ¼…3"
All flow sensors are also available in an Ex version.
Signal converter
Compact version (C) OPTIMASS x400 C (x = 1, 2, 3, 6 or 7)
Field housing (F) - MFC 400 F
remote version
Compact and field housing versions are also available in an Ex version.
Options
Outputs / inputs Current output (incl. HART®), pulse output, frequency output, and/or status output,
limit switch and/or control input (depending on the I/O version)
Totaliser 2 (optional 3) internal totalisers with a max. of 8 counter places (e.g. for counting
volume and/or mass units)
Verification Integrated verification, diagnostic functions: measuring device, process, measured
value, stabilisation
Concentration measurement Universal concentration measurement, °Brix, °Baume, °Plato, alcohol
concentration, NaOH and API density
Communication interfaces Foundation Fieldbus, Profibus PA and DP, Modbus, HART®
Page 285 of 307

Display and user interface

Graphic display LC display, backlit white.
Size: 128 x 64 pixels, corresponds to 59 x 31 mm = 2.32" x 1.22"
Display turnable in 90° steps.
Operating elements 4 push buttons/optical keys for operator control of the signal converter without
opening the housing.
Infrared interface for reading and writing all parameters with IR interface (option)
without opening the housing.
Remote operation PACTwareTM (incl. Device Type Manager (DTM))
HART® Hand Held Communicator from Emerson Process
AMS® from Emerson Process
PDM® from Siemens
All DTMs and drivers are available free of charge from the manufacturer's website.
Display functions
Operating menu Setting the parameters using 2 measuring pages, 1 status page, 1 graphic page
(measured values and graphics are freely adjustable)
Language display texts (as Standard: English, French, German, Dutch, Portuguese, Swedish, Spanish, Italian
language package)
Eastern Europe (in preparation): English, Slovenian, Czech, Hungarian
Northern Europe: English, Danish, Polish
Southern Europe: English, Turkish
China (in preparation): English, Chinese
Russia: English, Russian
Measurement functions Units: Metric, British and US units selectable as desired from lists for volume/mass
flow and counting, velocity, temperature, pressure
Measured values: Mass flow, total mass, temperature, density, volume flow, total
volume, velocity, flow direction (not displayed unit – but available via outputs), BRIX,
Baume, NaOH, Plato, API, mass concentration, volume concentration
Diagnostic functions Standards: VDI / NAMUR / WIB 2650 and NE 107
Status messages: Output of status messages optional via display, current and/or
status output, HART® or bus interface
Sensor diagnosis: Sensor values, drive level, measuring tube frequency, 2 phase
signal, drive coil impedance, insulation fault, circuit interruption, exceeding the
maximum flow, process temperature
Self-diagnosing sensor electronics: Electronics temperature, input gains, driver
amplifier
Signal converter and inputs/outputs: Data bus monitoring, current output
connections, electronics temperature, voltage drop, parameter and data integrity
Page 286 of 307

Measuring accuracy
Reference conditions Medium: water
Temperature: +20°C / +68°F
Pressure: 1 bar / 14.5 psi
Maximum measuring error Refer to technical data for the flow sensor.
Current output electronics ±5 µA
Temperature
Process temperature Refer to technical data for the flow sensor.
Ambient temperature Depending on the version and combination of outputs.
It is a good idea to protect the signal converter from external heat sources such as
direct sunlight as higher temperatures reduce the life cycle of all electronic
components.
-40…+65°C / -40…+149°F
Stainless steel housing: -40…+60°C / -40…+140°F
Storage temperature -50…+70°C / -58…+158°F
Pressure
Medium Refer to technical data for the flow sensor.
Ambient pressure Atmospheric
Chemical properties
State of aggregation Liquids, gases and slurries
Flow rate Refer to technical data for the flow sensor.
Other conditions
Ingress protection acc. to IP66/67 (acc. to NEMA 4/4X)
IEC 529 / EN 60529
Installation For detailed information, refer to chapter "Installation conditions".
Dimensions and weights For detailed information refer to chapter "Dimensions and weights".
Page 287 of 307

Materials
Signal converter housing Standard: die-cast aluminium (polyurethane coated)
Option: stainless steel 316 (1.4408)
Flow sensor For housing material, process connections, measuring tubes, accessories and
gaskets, refer to technical data for the flow sensor.
Electrical connection
General Electrical connection is carried out in conformity with the VDE 0100 directive
"Regulations for electrical power installations with line voltages up to 1000 V" or
equivalent national specifications.
Power supply Standard: 100…230 VAC (-15% / +10%), 50/60 Hz
Option 1: 24 VDC (-55% / +30%)
Option 2: 24 VAC/DC (AC: -15% / +10%, 50/60 Hz; DC: -25% / +30%)
Power consumption AC: 22 VA
DC: 12 W
Signal cable Only for remote versions.
10 core shielded cable. Detailed specifications are available on request.
Length: max. 20 m / 65.6 ft
Cable entries Standard: M20 x 1.5 (8...12 mm)
Option: ½ NPT, PF ½
Page 288 of 307

Inputs and outputs

General All outputs are electrically isolated from each other and from all other circuits.
All operating data and output values can be adjusted.
Description of abbreviations Uext = external voltage; RL = load + resistance;
U0 = terminal voltage; Inom = nominal current
Safety limit values (Ex i):
Ui = max. input voltage; Ii = max. input current; Pi = max. input power rating;
Ci = max. input capacity; Li = max. input inductivity
Current output
Output data Volume flow, mass flow, temperature, density, flow velocity, diagnostic value, 2-
phase signal
Concentration and concentration flow are also possible with available concentration
measurement (optional).
Temperature coefficient Typically ±30 ppm/K
Settings Without HART®
Q = 0%: 0…20 mA; Q = 100%: 10…20 mA
With HART®
Q = 0%: 4…20 mA; Q = 100%: 10…20 mA
Active Uint, nom = 24 VDC Uint, nom = 20 VDC
I ≤ 22 mA I ≤ 22 mA
RL ≤ 1 kΩ RL ≤ 450 Ω
U0 = 21 V
I0 = 90 mA
P0 = 0.5 W
C0 = 90 nF / L0 = 2 mH
C0 = 110 nF / L0 = 0.5 mH
Passive Uext ≤ 32 VDC Uext ≤ 32 VDC
I ≤ 22 mA I ≤ 22 mA
U0 ≥ 1.8 V U0 ≥ 4 V
RL ≤ (Uext - U0) / Imax RL ≤ (Uext - U0) / Imax

Ui = 30 V
Ii = 100 mA
Pi = 1 W
Ci = 10 nF
Li ~ 0 mH
Page 289 of 307

HART®
Description HART® protocol via active and passive current output
HART® version: V7
Universal HART® parameter: completely integrated
Load ≥ 250 Ω at HART® test point;
Note maximum load for current output!
Multidrop operation Yes, current output = 10%, e.g. 4 mA
Multi-drop address adjustable in operation menu 0...63
Device drivers Available for FC 375/475, AMS, PDM, FDT/DTM
Registration (HART Yes
Communication Foundation)
Pulse output or frequency output
Output data Pulse output: volume flow, mass flow, mass or volume of dissolved substance
during activated concentration measurement
Frequency output: flow velocity, mass flow, temperature, density, diagnostic value
Optional: concentration, flow of the dissolved substance
Function Can be set as a pulse output or frequency output
Pulse rate/frequency 0.01...10000 pulses/s or Hz
Settings Mass or volume per pulse or max. frequency for 100% flow
Pulse width: adjustable as automatic, symmetric or fixed (0.05...2000 ms)
Active - Unom = 24 VDC -
to fmax ≤ 100 Hz:
I ≤ 20 mA
open:
I ≤ 0.05 mA
closed:
U0, nom = 24 V
at I = 20 mA
to 100 Hz < fmax ≤ 10 kHz:
I ≤ 20 mA
open:
I ≤ 0.05 mA
closed:
U0, nom = 22.5 V
at I = 1 mA
U0, nom = 21.5 V
at I = 10 mA
U0, nom = 19 V
at I = 20 mA
Page 290 of 307

Passive Uext ≤ 32 VDC -

fmax ≤ 100 Hz:
I ≤ 100 mA
open:
closed:
U0, max = 0.2 V at I ≤ 10 mA
U0, max = 2 V at I ≤ 100 mA
100 Hz < fmax ≤ 10 kHz:
I ≤ 20 mA
open:
closed:
U0, max = 1.5 V at I ≤ 1 mA
U0, max = 2.5 V at I ≤ 10 mA
U0, max = 5.0 V at I ≤ 20 mA
open: open:
closed: closed:
Ui = 30 V
Ii = 100 mA
Pi = 1 W
Ci = 10 nF
Li ~ 0 mH
Low flow cut off
Function Switching point and hysteresis separately adjustable for each output, counter and
the display
Switching point Set in increments of 0.1%.
Hysteresis Set in increments of 0.1%.
Time constant
Function The time constant corresponds to the elapsed time until 67% of the end value has
been reached according to a step function.
Settings Set in increments of 0.1 seconds.
0…100 seconds
Page 291 of 307

Status output / limit switch

Function and settings Adjustable as automatic measuring range conversion, display of flow direction,
overflow, error or switching point.
Valve control with activated dosing function
Status and/or control: ON or OFF
I ≤ 20 mA
open:
I ≤ 0.05 mA
closed:
U0, nom = 24 V
at I = 20 mA
Passive Uext ≤ 32 VDC Uext ≤ 32 VDC -
I ≤ 100 mA I ≤ 100 mA
open: RL, max = 47 kΩ

I ≤ 0.05 mA at RL, min = (Uext - U0) / Imax
Uext = 32 VDC
open:
closed: I ≤ 0.05 mA
U0, max = 0.2 V at Uext = 32 VDC
at I ≤ 10 mA
U0, max = 2 V closed:
at I ≤ 100 mA U0, max = 0.2 V
at I ≤ 10 mA
U0, max = 2 V
at I ≤ 100 mA
open: open:
closed: closed:
Ui = 30 V
Ii = 100 mA
Pi = 1 W
Ci = 10 nF
Li = 0 mH
Page 292 of 307

Control input
Function Hold value of the outputs (e.g. for cleaning work), set value of the outputs to "zero",
counter and error reset, stop counter, range conversion, zero calibration
Start of dosing when dosing function is activated.
Ext. contact open:

U0, nom = 22 V
Ext. contact closed:

Inom = 4 mA
Contact open (Off):

U0 ≥ 12 V
with Inom = 1.9 mA

U0 ≤ 10 V
with Inom = 1.9 mA
Passive 8 V ≤ Uext ≤ 32 VDC 3 V ≤ Uext ≤ 32 VDC Uext ≤ 32 VDC
Imax = 6.5 mA Imax = 9.5 mA I ≤ 6 mA at Uext = 24 V

at Uext ≤ 24 VDC at Uext ≤ 24 V I ≤ 6.6 mA at Uext = 32 V
Imax = 8.2 mA Imax = 9.5 mA
at Uext ≤ 32 VDC at Uext ≤ 32 V On:
U0 ≥ 5.5 V or I ≥ 4 mA
Contact closed (On): Contact closed (On):
U0 ≥ 8 V U0 ≥ 3 V Off:
with Inom = 2.8 mA with Inom = 1.9 mA U0 ≤ 3.5 V or I ≤ 0.5 mA
Ui = 30 V
Contact open (Off): Contact open (Off): Ii = 100 mA
U0 ≤ 2.5 V U0 ≤ 2.5 V
Pi = 1 W
with Inom = 0.4 mA with Inom = 1.9 mA
Ci = 10 nF
Li = 0 mH
NAMUR - Active to EN 60947-5-6 -
Terminals open:
U0, nom = 8.7 V

U0, nom = 6.3 V
with Inom > 1.9 mA
Contact open (Off):

U0, nom = 6.3 V
with Inom < 1.9 mA
Detection of cable break:

U0 ≥ 8.1 V
with I ≤ 0.1 mA
Detection of cable short

circuit:
U0 ≤ 1.2 V
with I ≥ 6.7 mA
Page 293 of 307

PROFIBUS DP
Automatic data transmission rate recognition (max. 12 MBaud)
PROFIBUS PA
Typical error current FDE (Fault Disconnection Electronic): 4.3 mA
FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Link Master function (LM) supported
Tested with Interoperable Test Kit (ITK) version 6.01
Function blocks 6 x analogue input, 2 x integrator, 1 x PID
Output data Mass flow, volume flow, density, temperature of tube, several concentration
measurements and diagnostic data
Modbus
Description Modbus RTU, Master/Slave, RS485
Address range 1…247
Supported function codes 01, 03, 04, 05, 08, 16, 43
Supported Baudrate 1200, 2400, 3600, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 Baud
Page 294 of 307

Approvals and certificates

CE The device fulfils the statutory requirements of the EC directives. The manufacturer
certifies that these requirements have been met by applying the CE marking.
Non-Ex Standard
Hazardous areas
Option (C version only)
ATEX II 1/2 (1) G - Ex d ia [ia Ga] IIC T6…T1 Ga/Gb
II 1/2 (1) G - Ex de ia [ia Ga] IIC T6…T1 Ga/Gb
II 2 (1) G - Ex d ia [ia Ga] IIC T6…T1 Gb
II 2 (1) G - Ex de ia [ia Ga] IIC T6…T1 Gb
II 2 (1) D - Ex t [ia Da] IIIC Txxx°C Db
II 1/2 G - Ex d ia IIC T6…T1 Ga/Gb; II 1/2 G - Ex de ia IIC T6…T1 Ga/Gb
II 2 G - Ex d ia IIC T6…T1 Gb; II 2 G - Ex de ia IIC T6…T1 Gb
II 2 D - Ex t IIIC Txxx°C Db
Option (F version only)
ATEX II 2 (1) G - Ex d [ia Ga] IIC T6 Gb
II 2 (1) G - Ex de [ia Ga] IIC T6 Gb
II 2 (1) D - Ex t [ia Da] IIIC T75°C Db
II 2 G - Ex d [ia] IIC T6 Gb; II 2 G - Ex de [ia] IIC T6 Gb
II 2 D - Ex t IIIC T75°C Db
NEPSI Ex d ia [ia Ga] IIC T6…T1 Ga/Gb; Ex de ia [ia Ga] IIC T6…T1 Ga/Gb
Option
FM / CSA FM: Class I, Div 1 groups A, B, C, D
FM: Class I, Div 2 groups A, B, C, D
IECEx Ex zone 1 + 2
Custody transfer
Without Standard
Option Liquids other than water 2004/22/EC (MID MI005) acc. to OIML R 117-1
Gases 2004/22/EC (MID MI002) acc. to OIML R 137
Other standards and approvals
Shock and vibration resistance IEC 68-2-3
Electromagnetic compatibility 2004/108/EC in conjunction with EN 61326-1 (A1, A2)
(EMC)
European pressure equipment PED 97/23/EC
directive
NAMUR NE 21, NE 43, NE 53, NE 107
Page 295 of 307


8.3.1 Housing
Figure 8-1: Dimensions for field housing (F) - remote version
Dimensions [mm / inch] Weight [kg /

lb]
a b c g h
202 / 7.75 120 / 4.75 155 / 6.10 295.8 / 11.60 277 / 10.90 5.7 / 12.60
8.3.2 Mounting plate, field housing
Dimensions in mm and inch

[mm] [inch]
a 72 2.8
b 72 2.8
c Ø9 Ø0.4
Page 296 of 307

MFC 400 DESCRIPTION OF HART INTERFACE 9
9.1 General description

The open HART® protocol, which can be used freely, is integrated into the signal converter for
communication.
Devices which support the HART® protocol are classified as either operating devices or field
devices. When it comes to operating devices (Master), both manual control units (Secondary
Master) and PC-supported workstations (Primary Master) are used in, for example, a control
centre.
HART® field devices include measuring sensors, signal converters and actuators. The field
devices range from 2-wire to 4-wire to intrinsically safe versions for use in hazardous areas.
The HART® data are superimposed over the analogue 4...20 mA signal via FSK modem. This way,
all of the connected devices can communicate digitally with one another via the HART® protocol
while simultaneously transmitting the analogue signals.
When it comes to the field devices and secondary masters, the FSK or HART ® modem is
integrated, whereas with a PC communication takes place via an external modem which must be
connected to the serial interface. There are, however, other connection variants which can be
seen in the following connection figures.
9.2 Software history

INFORMATION!
In the table below, "x" is a placeholder for possible multi-digit alphanumeric combinations,
depending on the available version.
Release date Electronic HART®

Revision
Device Revision DD Revision
2012-xx-xx 1.0.0 1 1
HART® identification codes and revision numbers

Manufacturer ID: 69 (0x45)
Device: 204 (0xCC)
Device Revision: 1
DD Revision: 1
HART® Universal Revision: 7
FC 375/475 system SW.Rev.: ≥ 3.3
AMS version: ≥ 8.0
PDM version: ≥ 6.0
FDT version: ≥ 1.2
Page 297 of 307

9 DESCRIPTION OF HART INTERFACE MFC 400
9.3 Connection variants

The signal converter is a 4-wire device with 4...20 mA current output and HART® interface.
Depending on the version, the settings and the wiring, the current output can operate as passive
or active output.
• Multi-Drop Mode is supported

In a Multi-Drop communication system, more than 2 devices are connected to a common
transmission cable.
• Burst Mode is not supported
In the Burst Mode a slave device transfers cyclic pre-defined response telegrams, to get a
higher rate of data transfer.
INFORMATION!
For detailed information about the electrical connection of the signal converter for HART®, refer
to the section "Electrical connection".
There are two ways of using the HART® communication:
• as Point-to-Point connection and

• as multi-drop connection, with 2-wire connection or
as multi-drop connection, with 3-wire connection.
Page 298 of 307

9.3.1 Point-to-Point connection - analogue / digital mode
Point-to-Point connection between the signal converter and the HART® Master.
The current output of the device may be active or passive.
1 Primary master
2 FSK modem or HART® modem
3 HART® signal
4 Analog indication
5 Signal converter terminals A (C)
6 Signal converter terminals A- (C-)
7 Signal converter with address = 0 and passive or active current output
8 Secondary Master
9 Power supply for devices (slaves) with passive current output
10 Load ≥ 250 Ω (Ohm)
Page 299 of 307

9.3.2 Multi-Drop connection (2-wire connection)

In the case of a multi-drop connection, up to 15 devices may be installed in parallel (this signal
converter and other HART® devices).
The current outputs of the devices must be passive!
1 Primary Master
2 HART® modem
3 HART® signal
4 Other HART® devices or this signal converter (see also 7)
7 Signal converter with address > 0 and passive current output, connection of max. 15 devices (slaves) with 4…20 mA
8 Secondary Master
9 Power supply
10 Load ≥ 250 Ω (Ohm)
Page 300 of 307

9.3.3 Multi-Drop connection (3-wire connection)

Connection of 2-wire and 4-wire devices in the same network. In order that the current output of
the signal converter is working continuously active, an additional third wire must be connected
to the devices in the same network. These devices must be powered via a 2-wire loop.
1 Primary Master
2 HART® modem
3 HART® signal
4 2-wire external devices (slaves) with 4…20 mA, addresses > 0, powered by current loop
7 Connection of active or passive 4-wire devices (slaves) with 4…20 mA, addresses > 0
8 Load ≥ 250 Ω (Ohm)
9 Secondary Master
10 Power supply
Page 301 of 307

9.4 Inputs/outputs and HART® dynamic variables and device variables

The signal converter is available with various input/output combinations.
The connection of the terminals A…D to the HART® dynamic variables PV, SV, TV and 4V depends
on the device version.
PV = Primary Variable; SV = Secondary Variable; TV = Tertiary Variable; 4V = Fourth Variable
Signal converter version HART® dynamic variable
PV SV TV 4V
Basic I/O, connection terminals A D - -
Modular I/O and Ex i I/O, connection terminals C D A B
The signal converter can provide up to 14 measurement-related values. The measured values
are accessible as so-called HART® device variables and can be connected to the HART® dynamic
variables. The availability of these variables depends on the device versions and the settings.
Code = device variable code
Device variables
HART® device variable Code Type Explanations
Flow Velocity 0 linear

Volume Flow 1 linear
Mass Flow 2 linear
Temperature 3 linear
Density 4 linear
Sensor Average 5 linear Diagnostic value, optional, available
when one of the diagnostic channels (1,
2, 3) is set to "Sensor Average".
Sensor Deviation 6 linear Diagnostic value, optional, available
2, 3) is set to "Sensor Deviation".
Drive Level 7 linear Diagnostic value, optional, available
2, 3) is set to "Drive Level".
Tube Frequency 8 linear Diagnostic value, optional, available
9 linear 2, 3) is set to "Tube Frequency".
10 linear
2 Phase Signal 11 linear Diagnostic value, optional, available
2, 3) is set to "2 Phase Signal".
Concentration 1 12 linear Available when concentration
measurement is switched on.
Concentration 2 13 linear Available when concentration
measurement is switched on and
Concentration 2 is not switched off.
Page 302 of 307

HART® device variable Code Type Explanations
Concentration Flow 1 14 linear Available when concentration

Mass measurement is switched on and
concentration mode 1 does not measure
% volume or % alcohol per volume.
Volume measurement is switched on and
Concentration mode 1 measures %
volume or % alcohol per volume.
Mass measurement is switched on and
Concentration 2 is not switched off and
Concentration mode 1 does not measure
% volume or % alcohol per volume.
Volume measurement is switched on and
Concentration 2 is not switched off and
Concentration mode 2 measures %
volume or % alcohol per volume.
Totaliser 1 Mass 18 Totaliser
Totaliser 1 Volume 19 Totaliser
Totaliser 2 Mass 20 Totaliser
Totaliser 2 Volume 21 Totaliser
Totaliser 3 Mass 22 Totaliser Depends on hardware configuration
Totaliser 3 Volume 23 Totaliser Depends on hardware configuration
For the dynamic variables connected to the linear analogue outputs for current and/or
frequency, the assignment of the device variables takes place by selecting the linear
measurement for these outputs under the appropriate function of the signal converter. It follows
that the dynamic variables connected to current or frequency outputs can only be assigned to the
linear HART® device variables.
The HART® dynamic variable PV is always connected to the HART® current output.
A totaliser device variable can thus not be assigned to the dynamic variable PV because the PV is
always connected to the HART® current output.
Such correlations do not exist for dynamic variables not connected to linear analogue outputs.
Both linear and totaliser device variables can be assigned.
The totaliser device variables can only be assigned to the dynamic variables SV, TV and 4V if the
connected output is not a current or frequency output.
Page 303 of 307

KROHNE – Process instrumentation and measurement solutions
• Flow
• Level
• Temperature
• Pressure
• Process Analysis
© KROHNE 08/2015 - 4002075803 - MA MFC 400 R03 en - Subject to change without notice.
• Services

Tel.: +49 203 301 0
Fax: +49 203 301 10389
info@krohne.com
www.krohne.com
Page 304 of 307

HN2172
INSTALLATION GUIDE
VENDOR : KROHNE

Ship Class : ABS
Page 305 of 307

Web, www.krohne.com Headquarters in Germany
KROHNE MESSTECHNIK GMBH
KROHNE KOREA Web, www.krohne.co.kr
ROOM-508 MIWON B/D, #43 YOIDO-DONG, YOUNGDEUNGPO-KU, SEOUL, KOREA
KROHNE OIL & GAS T. 82 (0)2 782 1900 F. 82 (0)2 780 1749 E mail. Krohnekorea @hanmail.net / mail @krohne.co.
GUIDANCE NOTE
1. Install Coriolis flowmeters so they remain full of liquid and so air cannot get trapped inside the tubes.
2. The most desirable installation is in vertical pipes with upward flow,

but installation in horizontal piping is also acceptable.
3. Installations where the fluid flows downward in a vertical pipe are not recommended.
4. Install control valves downstream from Coriolis meters to increase backpressure on them and to
decrease t he probability of cavitation or flashing . (At least, meter outlet pipe should be shortly
upward before downstream in order to avoid cavitation)
5. Strong vibration can degrade accuracy.
1. Install Coriolis flowmeters so they remain full of liquid and so air cannot get trapped inside the tubes.
<full of liquid>
2. The most desirable installation is in vertical pipes with upward flow,

but installation in horizontal piping is also acceptable.
1. The meter can be mounted at an angle but it is recommended that the flow is uphill.
2. Horizontal mounting with flow running left to right.
3. The meter can be mounted vertically but it is recommended that the flow is uphill.
Page 306 of 307

Web, www.krohne.com Headquarters in Germany
KROHNE MESSTECHNIK GMBH
KROHNE KOREA Web, www.krohne.co.kr
ROOM-508 MIWON B/D, #43 YOIDO-DONG, YOUNGDEUNGPO-KU, SEOUL, KOREA
KROHNE OIL & GAS T. 82 (0)2 782 1900 F. 82 (0)2 780 1749 E mail. Krohnekorea @hanmail.net / mail @krohne.co.
3. Installations where the fluid flows downward in a vertical pipe are not recommended.
1. Avoid mounting the meter with the flow running downhill because it can cause siphoning.
2. Avoid mounting meter with vertical runs after the meter as it can cause cavitation.
3. Avoid mounting the meter vertically with the flow running downhill. This can cause siphoning.
4. Install control valves downstream from Coriolis meters to increase backpressure on them
and to decrease the probability of cavitation or flashing. (At least, meter outlet pipe should be
shortly upward before downstream in order to avoid cavitation)
5. Strong vibration can degrade accuracy.
Page 307 of 307

Mm-10 Flow Meter

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mm-10 Flow Meter

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HN2172

Hull Number : HN 2172

1. CALCULATION SHEET for Coriolis Mass Flowmeter……………………………………………

2. SPECIFICATION for Coriolis Mass Flowmeter ……………………………………………….……

3. DIMENSION DRAWING for Coriolis Mass Flowmeter ……………………………………………

4. WIRING DIAGRAM for Coriolis Mass Flowmeter ……………………………………………….…

5. Document for PD Meter …………………………………………………………….………….……

6. CATALOGUE for Coriolis Mass Flowmeter …………………………………………………………

7. MANUAL for Coriolis Mass Flowmeter …………………………………………………………….

8. INSTALLATION GUIDE for Coriolis Mass Flowmeter ……………………………………………

Hull Number : HN 2172

Tag No. AUX Boiler F.O (OF090F)

Density (operational) 0.989 S.G.

Viscosity 120.0 cSt

Pressure (gauge) 1.0 kg/cm²

Flow rate 1370 L/h (Volume)

OPTIMASS 6000 - S 25 1/2

112.3 0.072 0.6507 0.0069

250.0 0.1602 0.2923 0.0156

333.0 0.2134 0.2195 0.0209

500.0 0.3205 0.1462 0.032

685.0 0.4391 0.1067 0.0446

750.0 0.4807 0.1 0.0492

856.2 0.5488 0.1 0.0567

1000 0.641 0.1 0.0672

1028 0.6586 0.1 0.0692

1199 0.7684 0.1 0.082

1250 0.8012 0.1 0.0859

1370 0.8781 0.1 0.0953

OPTIMASS 6000 - S 25 2/2

OPTIMASS 6000 - S 25 1/2

147.6 0.0946 0.6507 0.0103

Pressure drop [kg/cm²]

OPTIMASS 6000 - S 25 2/2

OPTIMASS 6000 - S 50 1/2

273.0 0.0988 0.6481 0.0071

Pressure drop [kg/cm²]

OPTIMASS 6000 - S 50 2/2

Hull Number : HN 2172

Hull Number : HN 2172

10 see above 230 156 294 375 36.5 81

200 see above 1292 675 441 522 178 355

DO NOT SCALE DRAWING NAME DATE

15 see above 362 186 295 376 36.5 81 A 5

Hull Number : HN 2172

M.E. F.O SUPPLY

A01-022-04-CH (ME FO FLOW)

Cable and all connections are SHI scope,

Current Output Current Output Pulse Output Power DC 24V

* Signal output can be used only one at KOREA

Active or Passive. WIRING DIAGRAM

Hull Number : HN 2172

Type Dimension Max. Temperature

Pressure Anciliary VZF / VZFA

Required strainer : Dirt trap(suction strainer), NOT part of flow meter

CH-4106 Therwil Drawn by April 26, 2016 C. H. Seo

CH-4106 Therwil Drawn by April 26, 2016 C. H. Seo

VZF/ VZFA 15, 20 and 25 mm

 VZF/ VZFA 40 and 50 mm

Weight kg (flange version) 3.8 4.5 7.5 20.3 41.0

CH-4106 Therwil Drawn by April 26, 2016 C. H. Seo

CH-4106 Therwil Drawn by April 26, 2016 C. H. Seo

Optimized measuring concept

CH-4106 Therwil Drawn by April 26, 2016 C. H. Seo